WO2023005885A1 - 一种切换场景的数据转发方法及装置 - Google Patents

一种切换场景的数据转发方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023005885A1
WO2023005885A1 PCT/CN2022/107660 CN2022107660W WO2023005885A1 WO 2023005885 A1 WO2023005885 A1 WO 2023005885A1 CN 2022107660 W CN2022107660 W CN 2022107660W WO 2023005885 A1 WO2023005885 A1 WO 2023005885A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
protocol layer
packet
data packet
data
sdu
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/107660
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
刘菁
董朋朋
曹振臻
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023005885A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023005885A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a data forwarding method and device for switching scenarios.
  • a receiving device may switch from one sending device (called a source sending device) to another sending device (called a target sending device).
  • the source sending device may forward the data that was not successfully received by the receiving device before the handover to the target sending device, so that after the handover, the target sending device will send the data to the receiving device to prevent the receiving device from losing data.
  • the handover of the receiving device in the prior art does not consider the fact that the source sending device is sending data processed by network coding (NC) to the receiving device, so there is an urgent need for an NC application that considers the sending device in the handover scenario scheme.
  • NC network coding
  • a method for sending data may be implemented by a source sending device, and the source sending device may be a sending device or a component in a sending device.
  • the source sending device is, for example, a base station.
  • the source sending device may be used to send the data processed by the network coding function to the receiving device.
  • the source sending device may send the first data packet to the receiving device, wherein the first data packet includes the original data packet and/or the first redundant packet, or the first data packet includes the system packet and/or the second A redundant packet.
  • the first redundant packet can be processed by performing a network coding function on the original data packet, the original data packet is obtained according to the original data, and the system packet is obtained according to the original data packet.
  • the original data in this method may be a service data unit (service data unit, SDU) of the first protocol layer to be processed by the network coding function.
  • the source sending device may also receive the first information from the receiving device, and send a second data packet to the target sending device of the receiving device according to the first information, and the second data packet is used for the receiving device to restore the original data.
  • the first information may be used to indicate at least one of the following: the first SDU in the SDU of the second protocol layer restored by the receiving device according to the first data packet, the second protocol layer is the same as the first protocol layer Protocol layer or different protocol layers, the SDU of the second protocol layer corresponds to the SDU of the first protocol layer, for example, the SDU of the second protocol layer is the SDU of the first protocol layer, or the SDU of the second protocol layer is based on the SDU of the first protocol layer
  • the SDU of the first protocol layer is obtained through the processing of the second protocol layer; or, the number information of the redundant packets to be received, and the redundant packets to be received are used for the receiving device to restore the original data; or, the receiving device is correct The number information of the received first data packets or the number information of
  • the source sending device can know the reception of the first data packet by the receiving device before handover according to the first information, and accordingly can send the second data packet to the target sending device according to the first information, so that the receiving device can recover the first data packet.
  • the original data corresponding to a data packet enables the receiving device to still obtain the original data before switching after switching, avoiding packet loss, and thus improving transmission reliability.
  • the source sending device does not need to send the second data packet to the target sending device.
  • the first information can be used to indicate that no packet loss occurs in the receiving device before switching, and the source sending device does not need to forward data to the target sending device, so as to save signaling and processing overhead between sending devices.
  • the target sending device is a device that communicates with the receiving device after the receiving device performs handover
  • the source sending device is a device that communicates with the receiving device before the receiving device performs handover.
  • the application scenario of the method provided in this application is a switching scenario, which can improve the data transmission reliability of the receiving device in the scenario where the receiving device is switched from the source sending device to the target sending device.
  • the target sending device is a secondary station that communicates with the receiving device
  • the source sending device is a master station that communicates with the receiving device, so that data transmission reliability in a dual connection scenario can be improved.
  • the second data packet may include a second redundant packet corresponding to the original data, and the second redundant packet may include the first redundant packet, and/or include a redundant packet other than the first redundant packet. I bag.
  • the type of the second data packet is a redundant packet type.
  • the source sending device can send the second redundant packet corresponding to the original data to the target sending device, and the target sending device sends the data packet to the receiving device according to the second redundant packet, and the receiving device can send the data packet according to the received
  • the data packet recovers the SDU of the first protocol layer that was not successfully recovered before the handover. Since the second redundant packet is processed by network coding, the target sending device does not need to perform network coding processing on the second redundant packet, which can reduce the processing overhead of the target sending device.
  • the source sending device may also send first indication information to the target sending device, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the type of the second data packet is a redundant packet type.
  • the target sending device can know the type of the second data packet. If the type of the second data packet is a redundant packet type, the second data packet has already been processed by network coding, and the target sending device does not need to Perform network coding processing on the second data packet to save processing overhead and ensure that the receiving device can restore the SDU of the first protocol layer according to the second data packet.
  • the first indication information is carried in the GTP tunnel in the GTP header field.
  • the first indication information can be carried through the GTP header field, so as to realize efficient and flexible indication of the first indication information.
  • the second data packet is carried on a General Radio Packet Service Tunneling Protocol GTP tunnel; the method also includes:
  • the source sending device sends first indication information to the target sending device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the identifier of the GTP tunnel that carries the second data packet of the redundant packet type.
  • the first indication information may include an identifier of the GTP tunnel carrying the second data packet of the redundant packet type. Further, information indicating the type of the redundant packet may also be included.
  • the identifier of the GTP tunnel is, for example, a GTP terminal end identifier (terminal end identifier, TEID).
  • the first indication information may be carried in an Xn application protocol (Xn application protocol, Xn Ap) message. Therefore, the target sending device can determine whether the corresponding second data packet needs to be network coded according to the first indication information, so as to realize efficient and flexible indication of the first indication information.
  • the second data packet may further include a second SDU in the SDUs of the second protocol layer, and the second SDU does not include the first SDU.
  • the type of the second data packet is the SDU type.
  • the source sending device can forward the SDU of the second protocol layer that the receiving device failed to recover before handover to the target sending device, and the target sending device can send the second SDU to the receiving device without the need for the second SDU Perform network encoding processing to save processing overhead.
  • this solution can prevent the receiving device from obtaining repeated SDUs of the second protocol layer before and after the handover, and prevent the receiving device from repeatedly submitting data packets.
  • the source sending device may also send second indication information to the target sending device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the target sending device performs network coding function processing on the second data packet; and/or, the second indication information is used to indicate that the type of the second data packet is an SDU type .
  • the target sending device can determine according to the second indication information that network coding processing is not required for the second data packet, which can reduce the processing overhead of the target sending device and ensure that the receiving device can successfully recover the second SDU.
  • the source sending device adds 1 bit of information in the GTP header field of the Xn interface to indicate whether the second data packet forwarded through the GTP tunnel requires the destination sending device to perform network coding function
  • the value of the 1-bit information is 0, which indicates that the target sending device needs to perform network coding function processing on the second data packet.
  • the second indication information may indicate the sequence number (sequence number, SN) corresponding to the SDU that the target sending device needs to perform network coding processing, then the target sending device may not specify that the SN is smaller than the second indication information
  • the SDU of the indicated SN performs the processing of the network coding function, or the second indication information may indicate that the target sending device does not need to perform the sequence number (sequence number, SN) corresponding to the SDU of the network coding process, so that the target sending device can
  • the processing of the network coding function is not performed on the SDU whose SN is less than or equal to the SN indicated by the second indication information.
  • the second indication information may indicate the identifier of the GTP tunnel that bears the second SDU.
  • the method further includes: the source sending device sending second indication information to the target sending device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the identifier of the GTP tunnel carrying the second data packet of the SDU type.
  • the second indication information may include an identifier of the GTP tunnel carrying the second SDU.
  • information indicating the type of the SDU may also be included.
  • the identifier of the GTP tunnel is, for example, a GTP terminal end identifier (terminal end identifier, TEID).
  • the second indication information may be carried in an Xn application protocol (Xn application protocol, Xn Ap) message. Therefore, the target sending device can determine according to the second indication information whether the corresponding second SDU needs to be subjected to network coding processing, so as to realize efficient and flexible indication of the second indication information.
  • the source sending device may also send third indication information to the target sending device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the target The information of the first coding block processed by the sending device executing the network coding function, or the third indication information is used to indicate the information of the last coding block processed by the source sending device executing the network coding function.
  • the target sending device can determine the information of the coding block corresponding to the second data packet according to the third indication information, so as to avoid the information of the coding block of the second redundant packet or the second SDU being different from the information obtained by the target sending device after performing network coding processing.
  • the information of the coded blocks of the conflict occurs, so as to ensure that the receiving device can successfully decode the coded blocks from the target sending device.
  • the second data packet may include a group of SDUs of the second protocol layer corresponding to the original data.
  • the source sending device can perform network coding processing on a group of SDUs of the second protocol layer corresponding to the original data, then the source sending device can use the group of SDUs of the second protocol layer
  • the SDU is sent to the target sending device, and the group of SDUs of the second protocol layer may include the SDUs of the second protocol layer that have not been recovered by the receiving device before switching and the SDUs of the second protocol layer that have been recovered, so that the receiving device can start from
  • the target sending device obtains the system packets and/or redundant packets obtained by performing network coding on the group of SDUs to restore the original data, so as to improve transmission reliability.
  • the source sending device or the target sending device may also send fourth indication information to the receiving device, where the fourth indication information is used to instruct the receiving device to delete the SDU associated with the group of second protocol layers Data in which all or part of the data is repeated, wherein the repeated data includes at least one of the following: the PDU of the second protocol layer, the encoded packet corresponding to the PDU of the second protocol layer, or the PDU of the second protocol layer The SDU of the second protocol layer for the successful recovery of the corresponding coded packet.
  • the encoding package may include a redundant package, or a redundant package and a system package.
  • the receiving device deletes duplicate packets according to the fourth indication information, which can prevent the receiving device from repeatedly submitting the same data packet, for example, submitting to the upper layer of the second protocol layer.
  • the source sending device or the target sending device may send the fourth indication information to the receiving device through a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) message.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the way to instruct the receiving device to delete the duplicate data through the fourth indication information is, for example:
  • the fourth indication information includes an encoding block identification block ID (or block ID list, that is, multiple block IDs), and the receiving device can delete at least one of the following: the carried block ID is less than or equal to the block ID carried by the fourth indication information coded packets, PDCP SDUs successfully recovered through these coded packets, that is, coded packets with block IDs less than or equal to the block ID carried in the fourth indication information, or PDCP PDUs corresponding to these coded packets.
  • the coded package may include a system package and/or a redundant package. or,
  • the fourth indication information includes PDCP SN (or PDCP SN list, that is, multiple PDCP SNs), and the receiving device can delete at least one of the following according to the fourth indication information: the PDCP PDU corresponding to the SN, these PDCP PDUs, that is, the SN The corresponding PDCP PDU, the corresponding encoded packet, or the PDCP SDU successfully recovered from these encoded packets.
  • each PDCP SN corresponds to a PDCP PDU. or,
  • the fourth indication information includes initial PDCP SN information and a bitmap, and the initial PDCP SN corresponds to the initial PDCP PDU.
  • the bitmap can be used to indicate the PDCP PDU that needs to be deleted after the initial PDCP PDU, and the receiving device can delete at least one of the following according to the bitmap: PDCP PDUs after the initial PDCP PDU, these PDCP PDUs The corresponding encoded packets, or the PDCP SDUs successfully recovered from these encoded packets. or,
  • the fourth indication information may indicate the first PDCP PDU and/or the last PDCP PDU that the UE needs to delete, so that the receiving device can delete at least one of the following: the first PDCP PDU and the last PDCP PDU between PDUs, coded packets corresponding to these PDCP PDUs, or PDCP SDUs successfully recovered from these coded packets.
  • the first protocol layer and the second protocol layer are the same protocol layer, and the SDU of the second protocol layer corresponding to the first data packet has a first sequence number, and the first sequence number is used to identify the second protocol layer of SDUs.
  • Each SDU of the set of SDUs of the second protocol layer includes a first sequence number.
  • each SDU of the second protocol layer in the group of SDUs of the second protocol layer has a corresponding first sequence number, and the group of SDUs of the second protocol layer is carried on a General Wireless Packet Service Tunneling Protocol GTP tunnel, and the first sequence number A sequence number is carried in the GTP header field of the GTP tunnel. The first sequence number is used to identify the SDU of the second protocol layer.
  • the SDUs of the second protocol layer obtained by the receiving device before and after the switch contain the first sequence number, so the receiving device can identify whether the SDUs of the second protocol layer obtained before and after the switch are repeated according to the first sequence number. Then duplicate SDUs can be deleted to prevent the receiving device from repeatedly submitting the same data packet.
  • the source sending device may also receive sixth indication information from the target sending device, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate whether the target sending device supports processing of the network coding function.
  • the source sending device can learn whether the target sending device supports network coding.
  • the source sending device may also send configuration information of the network coding function to the target sending device, where the configuration information includes at least one of the following: network coding type, size of coding block, system package size, the size of the original data packet, the number of system packets, the number of redundant packets, the choice of encoding coefficients, or the convolution depth.
  • the source sending device can configure network coding configuration information to the target sending device, so that the target base station can use the information to process the network coding function.
  • the receiving device can use the same decoding information of the network coding function to compare the pre-switch and post-switch Decode the data packets processed by network encoding to improve decoding efficiency.
  • the first protocol layer includes service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP), radio link control (radio link control, RLC) or packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer
  • the second protocol layer includes the PDCP layer.
  • the network coding function of the source sending device is performed at the SDAP layer.
  • the SDU of the PDCP layer that is, the SDAP PDU, includes the data packet processed by the network coding, and the source sending device can send the second SDU of the SDU of the second protocol layer that has not been successfully recovered before the receiving device switches to the destination.
  • the device will send a data packet to the receiving device according to the second SDU, and the receiving device can recover the second SDU.
  • the target sending device does not need to support the network coding function.
  • the first protocol layer includes the PDCP layer or RLC layer.
  • the network coding of the source sending device is performed at the PDCP layer, and the source sending device forwards to the target sending device without passing through the network.
  • the coded PDCP SDU or the redundant packet obtained by network coding of the first protocol layer wherein the PDCP SDU that has not undergone network coding corresponds to the SDU of the first protocol layer to be recovered, and the target sending device performs network coding or After network coding processing is not performed, it is sent to the receiving device, so that the receiving device recovers the SDU of the first protocol layer to be recovered.
  • whether to perform network coding on the PDCP SDU can be based on protocol agreement or indicated to the receiving device.
  • a data forwarding method for switching scenarios is provided.
  • the method can be implemented by a receiving device.
  • the receiving device is, for example, a terminal device, or a chip that can be used in a terminal device.
  • the receiving device can receive the first data packet from the source sending device, and send the first information to the source sending device.
  • the receiving device can also receive a third data packet from the target sending device, the third data packet corresponds to the second data packet sent from the source sending device to the target sending device, the first information can be used to determine the second data packet, the second The second data packet can be used by the receiving device to recover the original data.
  • the target sending device is a device that communicates with the receiving device after the receiving device performs handover
  • the source sending device is a device that communicates with the receiving device before the receiving device performs handover.
  • the second data packet may include at least one of the following: the second redundant packet corresponding to the original data, the second SDU among the SDUs of the second protocol layer, or the original The data corresponds to a group of SDUs of this second protocol layer.
  • the PDU of the second protocol layer may carry fifth indication information, which is used to indicate whether the PDU of the second protocol layer has been processed by the network coding function.
  • the fifth indication information may include 1-bit information, for example, when the value of the 1-bit information is 0, it indicates that the PDU of the second protocol layer has undergone network coding processing, and when the value of the 1-bit information is 1 When , it indicates that the PDU of the second protocol layer has not been processed by network coding.
  • the fifth indication information may be carried in the header field of the PDU.
  • the receiving device may also receive the Based on the fifth indication information of the source sending device, the fifth indication information may be used to indicate whether the PDU of the second protocol layer has undergone network coding processing.
  • the fifth indication information may be included in a PDU header field of the second protocol layer, and/or, the fifth indication information may include 1-bit information.
  • the receiving device may receive fourth indication information from the source sending device or the target sending device, where the fourth indication information may be used to instruct the receiving device to delete the second protocol layer associated with the set of All or part of the data in the SDU is repeated, and the repeated data includes at least one of the following: the PDU of the second protocol layer, the system packet and/or redundant packet corresponding to the PDU of the second protocol layer , or the SDU of the second protocol layer successfully restored through the system packet and/or redundant packet corresponding to the PDU of the second protocol layer.
  • the first data packet and the third data packet corresponding to the The SDUs of the two protocol layers all have a first sequence number, and the first sequence number is used to identify the SDU of the second protocol layer.
  • Each SDU in the set of SDUs of the second protocol layer includes a first sequence number, or, each SDU of the second protocol layer in the set of SDUs of the second protocol layer has a corresponding first sequence number, and the set The SDU of the second protocol layer is carried in the General Radio Packet Service Tunneling Protocol GTP tunnel, and the first sequence number is carried in the GTP header field of the GTP tunnel.
  • the first protocol layer may include an SDAP layer, an RLC layer, or a PDCP layer
  • the second protocol layer may include a PDCP layer
  • a method for sending data is provided.
  • the method can be implemented by the target sending device, and the target sending device can be the sending device or a component in the sending device.
  • the target sending device is, for example, a base station.
  • the target sending device receives the second data packet from the source sending device, and sends the third data packet to the receiving device, wherein the third data packet is obtained according to the second data packet.
  • the third data packet is the second data packet, or a data packet obtained by processing according to the second data packet.
  • the second data packet is related to the first information, and the second data packet is used to restore the original data corresponding to the first data packet.
  • the target sending device is a device that communicates with the receiving device after the receiving device performs handover
  • the source sending device is a device that communicates with the receiving device before the receiving device performs handover.
  • the second data packet includes a second redundant packet corresponding to the original data.
  • the target sending device may receive first indication information from the source sending device.
  • the second data packet may include a second SDU among the SDUs of the second protocol layer.
  • the target sending device may also receive second indication information from the source sending device.
  • the target sending device may also receive third indication information from the source sending device.
  • the second data packet may include a group of SDUs of the second protocol layer corresponding to the original data.
  • the target sending device may also send fourth indication information to the receiving device.
  • the fourth indication information may be received by the target sending device from the source sending device.
  • the protocol data units PDUs of the second protocol layer corresponding to the first data packet and the third data packet both include the first sequence number
  • the first sequence number is used to identify the SDU of the second protocol layer
  • each SDU of the second protocol layer in the group of SDUs of the second protocol layer includes a first sequence number
  • the first sequence number is used to identify the SDU of the second protocol layer
  • the SDU of the second protocol layer, or, the SDU of each second protocol layer in the group of SDUs of the second protocol layer has a corresponding first sequence number, and the first sequence number is used to identify the SDU of the second protocol layer, and a set of SDUs of the second protocol layer
  • the SDU of the second protocol layer is carried in the GTP tunnel, and the first sequence number may be carried in the GTP header field of the GTP tunnel.
  • the target sending device may further send sixth indication information to the source sending device, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate whether the target sending device supports processing of the network coding function.
  • the target sending device may also receive configuration information from the network coding function of the source sending device.
  • the first protocol layer may include an SDAP layer, an RLC layer, or a PDCP layer
  • the second protocol layer may include a PDCP layer
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communications apparatus that can implement the method implemented by the source sending device in the first aspect or any possible design thereof.
  • the apparatus comprises corresponding units or components for performing the method described above.
  • the units included in the device may be implemented by software and/or hardware.
  • the apparatus may be, for example, a source sending device, or a chip, a chip system, a vehicle communication module, or a processor that can support the implementation of the above method in the source sending device.
  • the communication device may include modular components such as a transceiver unit (or a communication module, a transceiver module) and a processing unit (or a processing module), and these modules may implement the above-mentioned first aspect or any possible design thereof
  • the transceiver unit may be a sending unit when performing the sending step
  • the transceiver unit may be a receiving unit when performing the receiving step
  • the transceiver unit may be replaced by a transceiver
  • the sending unit may be replaced by a transmitter
  • the receiving unit can be replaced by a receiver.
  • the transceiver unit may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., and the processing unit may be a processor, such as a baseband chip.
  • the transceiver unit may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing unit may be a processor.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input-output interface of the system-on-a-chip, and the processing unit may be a processor of the system-on-a-chip, such as a central processing unit (CPU).
  • CPU central processing unit
  • the transceiving unit may be used to perform receiving and/or sending actions performed by the source sending device in the first aspect or any possible design thereof. For example, it can be used to execute the sending of the first data packet, the second data packet, the first indication information to the fourth indication information, and the configuration information of the network coding function performed by the source sending device as shown in the first aspect, and for the second On the one hand, it shows the reception of the first information and the sixth indication information.
  • the processing unit may be used to perform actions other than receiving and transmitting performed by the source sending device in the first aspect or any possible design thereof.
  • the processing unit may be used to generate data packets and information sent by the source sending device in the method shown in the first aspect, or to process information received by the source sending device in the method shown in the first aspect.
  • the communication device may include a transceiver module and/or a communication module.
  • the communication device may include a processor and/or a transceiver.
  • the communications device may also include memory.
  • the communication device may be realized by a circuit.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that can implement the method implemented by the receiving device in the above second aspect or any possible design thereof.
  • the apparatus comprises corresponding units or components for performing the method described above.
  • the units included in the device may be implemented by software and/or hardware.
  • the apparatus may be, for example, a receiving device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that can support the above method in the receiving device.
  • the communication device may include modular components such as a transceiver unit (or communication module, transceiver module) and a processing unit (or processing module), and these modules may implement the above second aspect or any possible design thereof corresponding function of the receiving device.
  • the transceiver unit can be a sending unit when performing the sending step
  • the transceiver unit can be a receiving unit when performing the receiving step
  • the transceiver unit can be replaced by a transceiver
  • the sending unit can be replaced by a transmitter.
  • Units can be replaced by receivers.
  • the transceiver unit may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing unit may be a processor, such as a baseband chip.
  • the transceiver unit may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing unit may be a processor.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input-output interface of the system-on-a-chip, and the processing unit may be a processor of the system-on-a-chip, such as a CPU.
  • the transceiver unit may be used to perform the receiving and/or sending actions performed by the receiving device in the second aspect or any possible design thereof. For example, it can be used to implement the receiving device's address of the first data packet, the third data packet, the fourth indication information, and the fifth indication information performed by the receiving device in the second aspect, or perform the sending of the first information.
  • the processing unit may be used to perform actions other than receiving and sending performed by the receiving device in the second aspect or any possible design thereof.
  • the processing unit may be used to generate information sent by the receiving device in the method shown in the second aspect, or to process data packets and information received by the receiving device in the method shown in the second aspect.
  • the communication device may include a transceiver module and/or a communication module.
  • the communication device may include a processor and/or a transceiver.
  • the communications device may also include memory.
  • the communication device may be realized by a circuit.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that can implement the method implemented by the target sending device in the above third aspect or any possible design thereof.
  • the apparatus comprises corresponding units or components for performing the method described above.
  • the units included in the device may be implemented by software and/or hardware.
  • the apparatus may be, for example, a target sending device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that can support the implementation of the above method in the target sending device.
  • the communication device may include modular components such as a transceiver unit (or a communication module, a transceiver module) and a processing unit (or a processing module), and these modules may implement the above third aspect or any possible design thereof corresponding function of the target sending device.
  • the transceiver unit may be a sending unit when performing the sending step
  • the transceiver unit may be a receiving unit when performing the receiving step
  • the transceiver unit may be replaced by a transceiver
  • the sending unit may be replaced by a transmitter
  • the receiving unit can be replaced by a receiver.
  • the transceiver unit may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., and the processing unit may be a processor, such as a baseband chip.
  • the transceiver unit may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing unit may be a processor.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input-output interface of the system-on-a-chip, and the processing unit may be a processor of the system-on-a-chip, such as a CPU.
  • the transceiver unit may be used to perform the receiving and/or sending action performed by the target sending device in the third aspect or any possible design thereof. For example, it can be used to perform the reception of the second data packet, the first indication information to the fourth indication information, and the configuration information of the network coding function performed by the target sending device as shown in the third aspect, and for the receiving of the configuration information shown in the third aspect.
  • the third data packet and the sixth indication information are sent.
  • the processing unit may be used to perform actions other than reception and transmission performed by the target sending device in the third aspect or any possible design thereof. For example, the processing unit may be used to generate data packets and information sent by the receiving device in the method of the third aspect, or to process data packets and information received by the receiving device in the method of the third aspect.
  • the communication device may include a transceiver module and/or a communication module.
  • the communication device may include a processor and/or a transceiver.
  • the communications device may also include memory.
  • the communication device may be realized by a circuit.
  • a communication system in a seventh aspect, includes the communication devices shown in the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, and the computer-readable storage medium is used for storing computer instructions or programs.
  • the computer instructions or programs are run on a computer, the computer is made to perform the above-mentioned first to third aspects. A method described in an aspect or any one of its possible implementations.
  • a computer program product which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method described in the above first to third aspects or any possible design thereof.
  • a circuit is provided, the circuit is coupled to a memory, and the circuit is used to execute the method described in the first aspect to the third aspect or any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • the circuit may include a circuit on a chip, a chip or a system on a chip, and the like.
  • beneficial effects of the above second to tenth aspects and their possible designs can refer to the beneficial effects of the first aspect and their possible designs.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2(a) is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2(b) is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2(c) is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2(d) is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4(a) is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4(b) is a schematic structural diagram of a protocol stack provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4(c) is a schematic structural diagram of another protocol stack provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a handover process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another handover process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7(a) is a schematic diagram of a network coding process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7(b) is a schematic diagram of another network coding process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another network coding process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a data forwarding method for switching scenarios provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another handover process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another handover process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of another handover process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another handover process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another handover process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of another handover process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • words such as “first” and “second” are used to distinguish the same or similar items with basically the same function and effect.
  • the first information and the second information are only for distinguishing different information, and the sequence thereof is not limited.
  • words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the number and execution order, and words such as “first” and “second” do not necessarily limit the difference.
  • “at least one” means one or more, and “multiple” means two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the contextual objects are an “or” relationship.
  • “At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items.
  • At least one item (unit) of a, b, or c may represent: a, b, c; a and b; a and c; b and c; or a and b and c.
  • a, b, c can be single or multiple.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system 1000 applied in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system includes a radio access network 100 and a core network 130 , and optionally, the communication system 1000 may also include the Internet 140 .
  • the radio access network 100 may include at least one radio access network device (such as 110a and 110b in FIG. 1 ), and may also include at least one terminal (such as 120a-120j in FIG. 1 ).
  • the terminal is connected to the wireless access network device in a wireless manner, and the wireless access network device is connected to the core network in a wireless or wired manner.
  • the core network equipment and the wireless access network equipment can be independent and different physical equipment, or the functions of the core network equipment and the logical functions of the wireless access network equipment can be integrated on the same physical equipment, or it can be a physical equipment It integrates some functions of core network equipment and some functions of wireless access network equipment. Terminals and wireless access network devices may be connected to each other in a wired or wireless manner.
  • FIG. 1 is only a schematic diagram.
  • the communication system may also include other network devices, such as wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the wireless access network device may be a device with a wireless transceiver function.
  • the wireless access network device may be a device that provides wireless communication function services, and is usually located on the network side, including but not limited to: a next-generation base station (gNodeB, gNB) in a fifth-generation (5th generation, 5G) communication system, the sixth Next generation base station in 6th generation (6G) mobile communication system, base station in future mobile communication system or access node in WiFi system, wireless access point, evolved node B (evolved node B, eNB in LTE system) ), radio network controller (radio network controller, RNC), node B (node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB) , base band unit (BBU), transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP), transmission point (transmitting point, TP), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), etc.
  • the access network device may include a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) node, or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU Node and user plane CU node, and RAN equipment of DU node.
  • the access network device provides services for the cell, and the user equipment communicates with the base station through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) used by the cell.
  • the cell may be a cell corresponding to the base station (for example, a base station). It can belong to a macro base station, or it can belong to a base station corresponding to a small cell.
  • the small cell here can include: a metro cell, a micro cell, a pico cell, and a femto cell ( Femto cell), etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
  • the radio access network device can be a macro base station (as shown in 110a in Figure 1), a micro base station or an indoor station (as shown in 110b in Figure 1), or a relay node or a donor node. Devices that provide wireless communication services for user devices, wireless controllers in cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenarios, relay stations, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, and network devices in future evolution networks.
  • CRAN cloud radio access network
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form adopted by the radio access network equipment.
  • a base station is used as an example of a radio access network device for description below.
  • the terminal can also be called terminal equipment, user equipment (user equipment, UE), mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), etc., which can be a user-side device for receiving or transmitting signals entities, such as mobile phones.
  • the terminal device may be user equipment (user equipment, UE), where the UE includes a handheld device, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, or a computing device with a wireless communication function.
  • the UE may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer or a computer with a wireless transceiver function.
  • the terminal device can also be a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in unmanned driving, a wireless terminal in telemedicine, a smart Wireless terminals in power grids, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, etc.
  • Terminals can be widely used in various scenarios, such as device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things ( Internet of things, IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, automatic driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wearables, smart transportation, smart city, etc.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • MTC machine-type communication
  • IOT Internet of Things
  • virtual reality augmented reality
  • industrial control automatic driving
  • telemedicine smart grid
  • smart furniture smart office
  • smart wearables
  • Terminals can be mobile phones, tablet computers, computers with wireless transceiver functions, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, smart home devices, etc.
  • the device for realizing the function of the terminal may be a terminal; it may also be a device capable of supporting the terminal to realize the function, such as a chip system, or a communication module, or a modem, etc., and the device may be installed in the terminal .
  • the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the terminal as an example where the device for realizing the functions of the terminal is a terminal and the terminal is a UE.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal device.
  • the UE can also be used as a base station.
  • UE can act as a scheduling entity between UEs in vehicle-to-everything (V2X), device-to-device (D2D) or peer-to-peer (P2P), etc.
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • D2D device-to-device
  • P2P peer-to-peer
  • Base stations and terminals can be fixed or mobile. Base stations and terminals can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on water; they can also be deployed on aircraft, balloons and artificial satellites in the air. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the application scenarios of the base station and the terminal.
  • the helicopter or drone 120i in FIG. 1 can be configured as a mobile base station.
  • 120i For those terminals 120j that access the wireless access network 100 through 120i, 120i is a base station ; But for the base station 110a, 120i is a terminal, that is, the communication between 110a and 120i is performed through the wireless air interface protocol. Of course, communication between 110a and 120i may also be performed through an interface protocol between base stations. In this case, compared to 110a, 120i is also a base station. Therefore, both base stations and terminals can be collectively referred to as communication devices, and 110a, 110b, and 120a-120j in FIG. 1 can be referred to as communication devices with their corresponding functions, such as communication devices with base station functions, or communication devices with terminal functions. communication device.
  • the communication between the base station and the terminal, between the base station and the base station, and between the terminal and the terminal can be carried out through the licensed spectrum, the communication can also be carried out through the unlicensed spectrum, and the communication can also be carried out through the licensed spectrum and the unlicensed spectrum at the same time; Communications may be performed on frequency spectrums below megahertz (gigahertz, GHz), or communications may be performed on frequency spectrums above 6 GHz, or communications may be performed using both frequency spectrums below 6 GHz and frequency spectrums above 6 GHz.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the frequency spectrum resources used for wireless communication.
  • the functions of the base station may also be performed by modules (such as chips) in the base station, or may be performed by a control subsystem including the functions of the base station.
  • the control subsystem including base station functions here may be the control center in the application scenarios of the above-mentioned terminals such as smart grid, industrial control, intelligent transportation, and smart city.
  • the functions of the terminal may also be performed by a module (such as a chip or a modem) in the terminal, or may be performed by a device including the terminal function.
  • the present application can be applied to various specific communication scenarios, for example, point-to-point transmission between a base station and a terminal or between terminals (as shown in Figure 2(a) is a point-to-point transmission between a base station and a terminal), multiple communication between a base station and a terminal Scenarios such as jump (as shown in Figure 2(b) and Figure 2(c)) transmission, dual connectivity (DC) of multiple base stations and terminals (as shown in Figure 2(d)) or multiple connections.
  • point-to-point transmission between a base station and a terminal or between terminals (as shown in Figure 2(a) is a point-to-point transmission between a base station and a terminal)
  • multiple communication between a base station and a terminal Scenarios such as jump (as shown in Figure 2(b) and Figure 2(c)) transmission, dual connectivity (DC) of multiple base stations and terminals (as shown in Figure 2(d)) or multiple connections.
  • jump as shown in Figure 2(b
  • FIG. 2(a) to FIG. 2(d) do not limit the network architecture applicable to this application, and this application does not limit uplink, downlink, access link, backhaul (backhaul) link, side link ( sidelink) and other transmissions.
  • FIG. 3 is a simplified schematic diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the base station 110 includes an interface 111 and a processor 112 .
  • Processor 112 may optionally store a program 114 .
  • Base station 110 may optionally include memory 113 .
  • the memory 113 may optionally store a program 115 .
  • UE 120 includes interface 121 and processor 122.
  • Processor 122 may optionally store a program 124 .
  • UE 120 may optionally include memory 123.
  • the memory 123 may optionally store a program 125 .
  • These components work together to provide the various functions described in this application.
  • processor 112 and interface 121 work together to provide a wireless connection between base station 110 and UE 120.
  • the processor 122 and the interface 121 work together to implement downlink transmission and/or uplink transmission of the UE 120.
  • the network 130 may include one or more network nodes 130a, 130b to provide core network functionality.
  • the network nodes 130a, 130b may be 5G core network nodes, or earlier generation (eg 4G, 3G or 2G) core network nodes.
  • the networks 130a, 130b may be Access Management Functions (AMFs), Mobility Management Entities (MMEs), or the like.
  • Network 130 may also include one or more network nodes in a public switched telephone network (PSTN), a packet data network, an optical network, or an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
  • PSTN public switched telephone network
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • WAN Wide Area Network
  • LAN Local Area Network
  • WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
  • wired network wireless network
  • metropolitan area network metropolitan area network
  • other networks to enable communication between UE 120 and/or base station 110.
  • a processor may include one or more processors and be implemented as a combination of computing devices.
  • Processors e.g., processor 112 and/or processor 122 may each include one or more of the following: a microprocessor, a microcontroller, a digital signal processor (DSP), a digital signal processing device (DSPD), a dedicated integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), gating logic, transistor logic, discrete hardware circuits, processing circuits, or other suitable hardware, firmware, and/or hardware and software combination for performing the various functions described in this application.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • DSPD digital signal processing device
  • ASICs dedicated integrated circuits
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • PLDs programmable logic devices
  • a processor may be a general-purpose processor or a special-purpose processor.
  • processor 112 and/or processor 122 may be a baseband processor or a central processing unit.
  • a baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data.
  • the central processing unit can be used to make the base station 110 and/or UE 120 execute software programs and process data in the software programs.
  • Interfaces may include devices for enabling communication with one or more computer devices (eg, UEs, BSs, and/or network nodes).
  • the interface may include wires for coupling a wired connection, or pins for coupling a wireless transceiver, or chips and/or pins for a wireless connection.
  • an interface may include a transmitter, receiver, transceiver and/or antenna. The interface can be configured to use any available protocol (eg 3GPP standard).
  • a program in this application is used in a broad sense to mean software.
  • Non-limiting examples of software are program code, programs, subroutines, instructions, instruction sets, codes, code segments, software modules, applications, software applications, and the like.
  • the program can run in the processor and/or the computer, so that the base station 110 and/or UE 120 perform various functions and/or processes described in this application.
  • Memory may store data that is manipulated by processors 112, 122 when executing software.
  • the memories 113, 123 may be implemented using any storage technology.
  • memory may be any available storage media that can be accessed by a processor and/or a computer.
  • Non-limiting examples of storage media include: RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM, removable media, optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage media, magnetic storage devices, flash memory, registers, state memory, remotely mounted memory, local or remote memory component, or any other medium capable of carrying or storing software, data or information and accessible by a processor/computer.
  • the memory (such as the memory 113 and/or the memory 123) and the processor (such as the processor 112 and/or the processor 122) can be provided separately or integrated together.
  • the memory may be used in connection with the processor such that the processor can read information from, store and/or write information to the memory.
  • the memory 113 may be integrated in the processor 112 .
  • the memory 123 may be integrated in the processor 122 .
  • the processor (such as the processor 113 and/or the processor 123) and the memory (such as the processor 112 and/or the processor 122) may be arranged in an integrated circuit (for example, the integrated circuit may be arranged in a UE or a base station or other network nodes middle).
  • gNB consists of one gNB-CU and one or more
  • One gNB-DU can only be connected to one gNB-CU, and the gNB-CU and gNB-DU are connected through the F1 interface, and the connection between gNB-CU and 5G core network (5G core, 5GC) They are connected through NG interface.
  • the gNB and the gNB (or gNB-CU) can be connected through the Xn (or Xn-C) interface.
  • the UE can access the gNB-CU through the gNB-DU.
  • the physical layer (physical layer, PHY), medium access control (medium access control, MAC) and radio link control (radio link control) equivalent to the UE , RLC) layer functions are located on the gNB-DU
  • PDCP, service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) and RRC layer functions that are equivalent to UE are located on the gNB-CU, as shown in Figure 4(b) and Figure 4 (c) shown.
  • the gNB-DU encapsulates the RRC message generated by the UE in the F1 application protocol (F1application protocol, F1AP) message on the F1 interface and sends it to gNB-CU.
  • F1 application protocol F1application protocol
  • the gNB-CU encapsulates the RRC message in the F1AP message and sends it to the gNB-DU.
  • the gNB-DU extracts the RRC message from the F1AP message and maps it to the SRB (SRB0/SRB) corresponding to the wireless (Uu) interface. SRB1/SRB2) to the UE.
  • the control plane may also involve gNB-DU and gNB-CU in stream control transmission protocol (stream control transmission protocol, SCTP), IP, layer 2 (layer 2, L2) or layer 1 (layer 2). 1, the processing of protocol layers such as L1), and the processing involving UE and gNB-DU at protocol layers such as RLC, MAC and PHY, and the processing involving UE and gNB-CU at protocol layers such as RRC and PDCP.
  • SCTP stream control transmission protocol
  • IP layer 2
  • layer 2 layer 2
  • layer 1 layer 2
  • L1 layer 1
  • the gNB-DU maps the UE data packets received from the Uu interface DRB to the corresponding general packet radio service (GPRS)
  • the user plane (GTP-U) of the tunnel protocol (GPRS tunnel protocol, GTP) tunnel is sent to the gNB-CU.
  • GTP-U general packet radio service
  • the gNB-CU maps the UE data packet to the corresponding GTP tunnel and sends it to the gNB-DU
  • the gNB-DU extracts the UE data packet from the GTP tunnel, and maps the UE data packet to the DRB corresponding to the Uu interface sent to the UE.
  • the user plane may also involve the processing of gNB-DU and gNB-CU at the user datagram protocol (user datagram protocol, UDP), IP, L2 or L1 and other protocol layers, and involves UE and The processing of gNB-DU at protocol layers such as RLC, MAC, and PHY, and the processing involving UE and gNB-CU at protocol layers such as SDAP and PDCP.
  • user datagram protocol user datagram protocol, UDP
  • IP user datagram protocol
  • L2 or L1 and other protocol layers and involves UE and The processing of gNB-DU at protocol layers such as RLC, MAC, and PHY, and the processing involving UE and gNB-CU at protocol layers such as SDAP and PDCP.
  • UE may perform handover.
  • the handover here is that the UE is handed over from the source base station to the target base station.
  • the source base station is such as source gNB (source gNB, S-gNB)
  • the target base station is such as target gNB (target gNB, T-gNB).
  • the processing for services using different RLC transmission modes is different during the handover process.
  • the RLC transmission modes include Unacknowledged Mode (UM) and Acknowledged Mode (AM).
  • ARQ automatic repeat-request
  • the gNB-DU can know the reception status of the PDCP protocol data unit (protocol data unit, PDU) by the UE, and report to the gNB-CU Send a downlink data delivery status (DDDS) message.
  • the DDDS message can carry information about the UE's reception of the PDCP PDU, so as to further notify the gNB-CU of the UE's reception of the PDCP PDU.
  • the CU of the source base station may be represented as S-gNB-CU, and the DU of the source base station may be represented as S-gNB-DU.
  • the CU of the target base station can be expressed as T-gNB-CU, and the DU of the target base station can be expressed as T-gNB-DU.
  • the downlink data processing is taken as an example, and the respective processing manners of the source base station, the target base station, and the UE when handover occurs are described.
  • the source base station forwards the PDCP SDU to the target base station, and the PDCP SDU does not include the SDU that has been processed by the PDCP layer of the source base station and sent to the RLC layer. That is to say, as long as the source base station transmits the PDCP PDU corresponding to the PDCP SDU to the RLC layer, no matter whether the UE receives the PDCP SDU, the source base station will not forward the PDCP SDU to the target base station on the Xn interface.
  • the PDCP layer of the S-gNB receives PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2, PDCP SDU3, and PDCP SDU4 from the upper layer, where PDCP SDU1 and PDCP SDU2 have been processed by the PDCP layer to generate PDCP PDU1 and PDCP PDU2 and submitted to the RLC layer, then during the UE handover process, the S-gNB-CU only forwards PDCP SDU3 and PDCP SDU4 to the T-gNB-CU through the Xn-C interface, and no longer forwards PDCP SDU1 and PDCP SDU2 to the T -gNB-CU.
  • PDCP layer processing refers to at least one of the processing of associating PDCP SN, header compression, encryption/integrity protection processing, or adding PDCP header.
  • the source base station forwards the PDCP SDU to the target base station, and the PDCP SDU does not include the SDU that the UE has successfully received. That is to say, the RLC layer of the source base station can determine the reception status of the RLC SDU (equivalent to the PDCP PDU) at the UE side according to the ARQ feedback of the UE.
  • the source base station forwards the PDCP SDU corresponding to the RLC SDU that has not received the RLC ACK feedback to the target base station on the Xn interface, because the PDCP SDU has been processed at the source base station and is associated with a PDCP SN, in order to ensure service continuity , when the source base station forwards the PDCP SDU to the target base station, it also needs to forward the SN associated with the SDU, so that the target base station continues to process the PDCP SDU using the original associated SN to generate a PDCP PDU and send it to the UE.
  • the source base station forwards the PDCP SDU to the target base station through the GTP tunnel, and carries the SN associated with the PDCP SDU in the GTP tunnel header field.
  • the source base station forwards the PDCP SDU that has not been processed by the PDCP layer to the target base station on the Xn interface, and the target base station uses the DL COUNT value carried in the SN state transition message to process the PDCP SDU to generate a PDCP PDU and send it to the UE.
  • the UE processes the received PDCP PDUs in sequence according to the size of the SN.
  • the source base station receives PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2, PDCP SDU3, and PDCP SDU4.
  • the source base station can know that the UE has not received SDU2 correctly.
  • the source base station forwards PDCP SDU2, PDCP SDU3 and PDCP SDU4 to the target base station on the Xn interface, and forwards SDU2
  • the network coding function in this application includes performing network coding on the original data packet and adding a coded packet header.
  • the network coding can be realized by an encoder, the input of the encoder is K original data packets, and the output of the encoder is N encoded data packets (abbreviated as encoded packets), where N and K are both positive integers, and N is greater than K.
  • the coded package includes N-K (N minus K) redundant packages and K system packages, or N redundant packages (that is, all coded packages are redundant packages, excluding system packages).
  • the content of the package body of the system package is consistent with the content of the original data package (that is, the system package is composed of the coded package header and the original data package), that is, the coding coefficient of the system package is a unit vector.
  • the system package can be obtained by directly adding a header to the original data package. Coding coefficients of redundant packets are non-unit vectors.
  • the receiving device can decode the redundant packet and the successfully received original data packet or system packet together, and restore the original data packet that was not successfully received. data pack. Based on the characteristics of network coding, the packet size of the original data packet is equal.
  • the network coding function may also include a process of processing the original data to obtain original data packets of equal size, and the processing may include one or more of segmentation, concatenation, or padding.
  • the network encoding function of the sending device corresponds to the network decoding function of the receiving device.
  • the receiving device can restore K original data packets by decoding at least K coded packets that are successfully received.
  • the protocol layer with the network coding function or the corresponding decoding function of the network coding is called the network coding/decoding layer.
  • the network coding/decoding layer is referred to as the network coding layer for short. is the network encoding layer.
  • the original data may be an SDU of a certain protocol layer.
  • the network coding layer can be radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) layer, SDAP, PDCP layer, backhaul adaptation protocol (backhaul adaptation protocol, BAP) layer, radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media Access control (medium access control, MAC) layer, or protocol layer such as PHY.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • SDAP Secure Digital Protocol
  • PDCP backhaul adaptation protocol
  • BAP backhaul adaptation protocol
  • radio link control radio link control
  • media Access control medium access control
  • protocol layer such as PHY.
  • the network coding layer can also be a new protocol layer except the PHY layer, the MAC layer, the RLC layer, the BAP layer, the PDCP layer, the SDAP layer and the RRC layer, which can increase the network coding layer above the PDCP layer (for example: In 5G NR, a network coding layer is added between the PDCP layer and the SDAP layer), or, a network coding layer is added above the BAP layer, or, a network coding layer is added between the PDCP layer and the RLC layer, or, at the RLC layer Add a network coding layer between the MAC layer and the MAC layer, or add a network coding layer between the MAC layer and the PHY layer.
  • the block code schemes include random linear network coding (RLNC), deterministic linear network coding (DLNC), Batch sparse code (BATS code), erasure code (erasure code), fountain code (fountain code), maximum distance separable code (maximum distance separable code, MDS code), ruby transform code (luby transform, LT ) code, fast tornado (rapid tornado) code, RaptorQ code, rateless (rateless) code and Reed-Solomon (Reed-Solomon, RS) code, etc.
  • the scheme of the convolution code includes convolution One or more of network coding (convolutional network coding, CNC), streaming coding (streaming code) and sliding window network coding (sliding window network coding), etc.
  • the first possible network coding process is the first possible network coding process:
  • the original data is obtained first, where the original data may be an SDU of a protocol layer that performs network coding, that is, a PDU received by a protocol layer that performs network coding.
  • the original data is PDU as an example for description, and the sending device can obtain an original data packet of equal size by one or more of processing such as segmentation, concatenation, or adding padding to one or more PDUs.
  • the original data packet carries a correspondence between each original data packet and one or more PDUs corresponding to the original data packet.
  • the carrying may be explicit carrying, for example, carrying the position mapping relationship between each original data packet and one or more PDUs corresponding to the original data packet, or the carrying may be implicit carrying, for example, each The correspondence between the original data packet and one or more PDUs corresponding to the original data packet is default. In this way, the receiving device (referred to as the receiving end) can recover the PDU from the original data packet based on the correspondence.
  • the header of each original data packet carries the correspondence between the original data packet and one or more PDUs corresponding to the original data packet.
  • a possible implementation is: firstly perform one or more of the aforementioned splitting, cascading, or adding padding on the PDU to obtain the original data, and then add a header to the original data to obtain the original data of the same size. data pack.
  • the corresponding relationship may be indicated by the division and/or concatenation of the one or more PDUs.
  • the original data itself is of equal size
  • one or more of the above processes of dividing one or more PDUs or SDUs, cascading or adding padding can be skipped to obtain equal-sized
  • the step of the original data packet, that is, the PDU or SDU is the original data packet of equal size.
  • Figure 7(a) and Figure 7(b) take the PDU as the original data with different sizes and carry the above corresponding relationship through the header (represented as Header) as an example, first process PDU1 ⁇ PDU4 to obtain the original data Data1 ⁇ Data4, here
  • the processing of the PDU can be one or more of operations such as segmentation, concatenation, or padding.
  • the size of the original data can be equal or unequal.
  • the original data packets can be understood as unencoded data packets , and the size of the original packet is equal.
  • any one of three ways may be adopted to encode multiple original data packets of equal size.
  • Method 1 encodes a group of K original data packets and adds a coded packet header (represented as NC_Header), to obtain N-K coded packets, where the coded packets can be called redundant packets or verification packets, that is, EPkt1-EPkt2 shown in Fig. 7(a).
  • K is a positive integer
  • N is a positive integer not less than K.
  • the originator finally sends K original data packets and N-K redundant packets.
  • N encoded packets are obtained by processing K original data packets, such as EPkt1 ⁇ EPkt6 in the figure.
  • the encoded packets can be divided into system packets and redundant packets. Also known as system packets.
  • the header of the encoded packet may include a coefficient factor field, and the coefficient factor field indicates the encoding coefficient for obtaining the encoded packet.
  • the system packets (EPkt1 ⁇ EPkt4) are composed of a coded packet header and a packet body. The content of the packet body is consistent with the content of the original data packet, and the coefficient factor field included in the packet header is a unit vector. Therefore, the process of processing the original data packet to obtain the system packet may include two methods, 2 and 3, wherein K is a positive integer, and N is a positive integer not less than K.
  • the original data packet is directly added with an encoded packet header to generate a system packet, that is, no encoding process is performed.
  • the original data packet is encoded, that is, after the coefficient factor of the unit vector is encoded, and the header of the encoded packet is added to generate a system packet.
  • the redundant packets in mode 2 and mode 3 are generated in the same manner, both of which are generated by encoding the original data packet and adding the header of the encoded packet.
  • N-K redundant packets such as EPkt5 ⁇ EPkt6
  • K original data packets such as Pkt1 ⁇ Pkt4
  • the packet body EData1 ⁇ EData1
  • the coefficient factors are non-unit vectors.
  • the originator finally sends N encoded packets.
  • the receiving end receives at least K data packets, and the K data packets are linearly independent, that is, the rank of the corresponding coefficient matrix is equal to K, In this way, the receiving end can recover K original data packets through decoding, and then recover corresponding PDUs.
  • the at least K data packets may all be redundant packets, or some may be original data packets and some may be redundant packets, which is not limited here. It can be understood that, if the receiving end receives K original data packets, decoding may not be performed.
  • the receiving end receives at least K data packets, and the K data packets are linearly independent, that is, the rank of the corresponding coefficient matrix is equal to K, so that the receiving end K original data packets can be recovered through decoding, and then the corresponding PDU can be recovered.
  • All of the at least K data packets may be redundant packets, or some of them may be system packets and some of them may be redundant packets, which is not limited herein. It is understandable that if the receiving end receives K system packets, then decoding may not be performed, and only the headers of the de-encoded packets may be processed.
  • the original data packets of equal size are obtained by one or more of the processing of dividing, concatenating, or adding padding to one or more original data, wherein the original data packets carry each Correspondence between an original data packet and one or more original data corresponding to the original data packet.
  • one or more of virtual segmentation, concatenation or padding can be used to obtain equal-sized original data packets.
  • the original data and the header information of each original data are first mapped to the cache.
  • the cache can be a real cache or a virtual cache.
  • the header information of each original data indicates that each original data is mapped in the cache. position in .
  • a plurality of equal-sized original data packets are encoded to obtain an encoded packet.
  • the method of obtaining multiple original data packets of the same size from the cache can be preset, or the sending end indicates to the receiving end, or the one in the control position of the two parties of data transmission determines and indicates to the other party.
  • the original data packet has no header, but considering the alignment with the description in the first method, the equal-sized data segment obtained from the cache in this solution is still called the original data packet. It can be understood that the original data packet in this solution may also be referred to as an original data segment.
  • the method of encoding multiple equal-sized original data packets to obtain encoded packets is similar to the method 1 in the first possible implementation process, and the difference from method 1 is that after encoding, the sender sends one or more original Data and header information of the one or more original data, and one or more of redundant packets obtained by encoding.
  • the input of the network coding layer may be one or more original data units, such as original data
  • the output of the network coding layer may be one or more PDUs
  • the one or more PDUs may include the aforementioned original data package and redundant package, or, the aforementioned system package and redundant package.
  • outputting the one or more PDUs may be understood as outputting the one or more PDUs in the terminal device or in the network device to a module that subsequently processes the one or more PDUs through a communication interface.
  • the output mentioned in this application may refer to sending a signal on an air interface, or may refer to outputting a signal in a device (for example, a terminal device or a network device) to other modules in the device through a communication interface.
  • a device for example, a terminal device or a network device
  • the specific process is specifically described in the application scenario, and will not be repeated here.
  • the specific encoding operation is briefly described by taking RLNC as an example.
  • the RLNC scheme uses a coding block (block) as a coding unit, and a coding block includes multiple original data packets of the same size, and a set of coded packets can be obtained by constructing a coding coefficient matrix to encode the original data packets.
  • the coefficients in the coding coefficient matrix are randomly selected in a finite field, such as Galois field (Galois field, GF).
  • Galois field Galois field
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of random linear network coding. As shown in FIG. 8, the size of the coding coefficient matrix (that is, A (W+R) ⁇ W in FIG.
  • W 8 is (W+R) ⁇ W, that is, (W+R) rows and W columns, wherein, in this example, A row vector in the coding coefficient matrix is called a coding coefficient vector, and W +R coded data (Fig. 8 in Y (W+R) ⁇ 1 ), the corresponding code rate is expressed as W/(W+R), or the corresponding redundancy rate is expressed as R/(W+R).
  • the encoding coefficient matrix randomly selects coefficients in the GF(q) field, q represents the size of the Galois field, and the value of the Galois field is in the interval [0,q-1]. Both W and R are positive integers.
  • each coding block wherein W+R coded data obtained by network coding a coding block containing W original data packets, that is, the coding operation is performed on each independent coding block
  • the redundancy (code rate) of each coding block may or may not be the same.
  • the encoding end/sending device sends the W original data packets and the generated W+R encoded data uniformly with header information, and when the decoding end/receiving device receives at least W correct encoding packets whose encoding coefficient vectors are linearly independent, Alternatively, when at least W correct encoded packets are received and the rank of the encoding coefficient matrix corresponding to the received encoded packets is W, then W original data packets can be correctly decoded and recovered. This is because the encoded packet combines information of several original data packets, so the receiving device can use the encoded packet to restore the original data packet.
  • the coded data generated by multiplying the original data packet by the coding coefficient of the unit vector is added with the coded packet header, or the original data packet is obtained by directly adding the coded packet header.
  • the original data packet uses a coding coefficient matrix with a size of (W+R) ⁇ W (that is, A(W+R) ⁇ W in Figure 8) to perform network coding to obtain W+R coded data, where the coding coefficient matrix can be written as Wherein the sub-matrix I W formed by the first W rows is a unit matrix, which is composed of W unit vectors, and the W coded data corresponding to the I W part in the obtained W+R coded data is the data part of the W system package, Adding header information to encoded data is the system packet.
  • Redundant packet It is generated by network coding the original data packet, and the coding coefficient of the redundant packet is a non-unit vector.
  • a coding coefficient matrix with a size of (W+R) ⁇ W that is, A(W+R) ⁇ W in Figure 8) is used for network coding to obtain W+R coded data, where the coding coefficient matrix can be written as Among the W+R coded data, the R coded data corresponding to the G R ⁇ W part is the data part of the R redundant coded packets, and adding header information to the R coded data is the redundant packet.
  • the term "redundant package” may also be called "check package", and the two may be used interchangeably.
  • Network coding grouping A term related to grouping codes.
  • grouping codes a network coding grouping is a collection of multiple original data packets. For example, dividing each W original data packet into a network coding group and performing independent network coding can obtain coded data corresponding to the network coding group.
  • the term “network coding group” may also be referred to as “network coding block", “coding group”, or "coding block”.
  • Network coding window is a term used for network coding schemes or convolutional codes that include sliding windows.
  • Network coding windows contain multiple original data packets. The original data packets contained in different network coding windows can be partially same. For example, W original data packets are obtained by using a sliding window for L original data packets, L and W are both positive integers and L is not less than W, as the current network coding window, and W packets in the network coding window Perform network encoding on the original data packet to obtain the encoded data corresponding to the network encoding window, and slide the network encoding window to obtain another set of original data packets as data packets to be encoded. It should be noted that the size of the network encoding window It can be different before and after sliding.
  • the size of the network coding window refers to the number of original data packets contained in the network coding window, and the original data packets contained in the network coding window can be partly the same before and after sliding.
  • the term “network coding window” may also be referred to as “network coding window”, “network coding sliding window”, “coding window”, “coding window”, “sliding window”, or, “sliding window "wait.
  • Network coding window is a term used for network coding schemes or convolutional codes that include sliding windows.
  • Network coding coding depth is the number of original data packets encoded within the network coding window, or the size of the network coding window . For example, W original data packets are obtained by using a sliding window for L original data packets, L and W are both positive integers and L is not less than W, as the current network coding window, and W packets in the network coding window Network coding is performed on the original data packet to obtain the coded data corresponding to the network coding window, then the current network coding depth is W.
  • network coded depth may also be referred to as “network coded convolutional depth”, “coded depth”, “convolutional depth”, “sliding window size”, “sliding window size”, or , “window size”, etc.
  • Network Coding Convolution Depth Same as “Network Coding Coding Depth”.
  • Network coding sliding window Same as "Network coding window”.
  • Finite field also known as Galois field, is a field containing only a limited number of elements, which can perform addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division operations, and the results of addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division operations will not exceed the set of the field.
  • the decoding situation indicates the success rate and/or failure rate of the decoding corresponding to the network coding group or the network coding sliding window within a period of time, wherein the network coding group or the network coding sliding window All the original data packets in the network are successfully decoded, which means that the network coding group or the network coding sliding window is successfully decoded;
  • the proportion of successfully decoded network coding packets to all network coding packets, or the ratio of successfully decoded network coding sliding windows to all network coding sliding windows within a period of time, and the failure rate is the network coding packets that fail to decode within a period of time
  • the network coding bit rate refers to the ratio of the number of original data packets to the number of encoded packets, or, the network coding bit rate refers to the ratio of the number of original data packets newly participating in encoding in the current encoding window to the number of current encoding packets.
  • the number of original data packets newly involved in encoding is the number of original data packets contained after the sliding window is slid minus the number of the same original data packets contained after sliding and before sliding, and the number of encoded packets is the system packet The sum of the number of and the number of redundant packets, or the number of redundant packets.
  • the network coding layer refers to the protocol layer with network coding function.
  • the network coding layer can be RRC layer, SDAP layer, PDCP layer, BAP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, or PHY layer with network coding function.
  • One or more of the layers is not limited in this application.
  • the network coding layer can also be a new protocol layer other than the above protocol layer, for example, the new protocol layer can be above the PDCP layer, above the BAP layer, between the PDCP layer and the RLC layer, between the RLC layer and the MAC layer between layers, or between the MAC layer and the PHY layer, the position of the new protocol layer may not be limited in this application.
  • network coding layer may also be referred to as “codec layer”, “codec layer”, “network codec layer”, “network codec layer”, “network codec layer” , “network encoding/decoding layer” or other names are not limited in this application.
  • the decoding of network coding is the inverse process of network coding. Using the received coded data, the original data packet can be recovered by multiplying the inverse matrix of the corresponding matrix of the coded data with the coded data.
  • the rank of the matrix corresponding to the coded data it can reflect the number of data packets whose coded coefficient vectors are linearly independent.
  • Protocol data unit (protocol data unit, PDU): A data unit passed between protocol entities.
  • the PDU contains information from the upper layer and additional information from the entity of the current layer. This PDU will be transmitted to the next lower layer.
  • PDCP SDU The data unit transmitted between the protocol layers is the data from the upper layer or the data to be transmitted to the upper layer.
  • the transmitting device may be the aforementioned base station, or may be a host node, for example: an integrated access backhaul (IAB donor, integrated access and backhaul, integrated access backhaul, IAB donor).
  • the receiving device may be a UE, or a relay node, such as an IAB node.
  • the UE may switch from one transmitting device (called a source transmitting device) to another transmitting device (called a target transmitting device), for example, the source transmitting device may be a source base station, and the target transmitting device may be target base station.
  • a source transmitting device may be a source base station
  • a target transmitting device may be target base station.
  • the source network device may be the source base station, or the gNB-CU of the source base station in the CU-DU separation scenario (hereinafter referred to as the source gNB-CU), and/or the target network device may be the target base station, or the CU-DU
  • the gNB-CU of the target base station in the DU separation scenario hereinafter referred to as the target gNB-CU.
  • the data sending or receiving method provided by the embodiment of this application is described by taking the source sending device as the source base station, the target sending device as the target base station, and the receiving device as UE, and the network code as block code as an example. . It can be understood that the embodiment of the present application may also be applicable to the network encoding as a convolutional code. The embodiments of the present application may be applied to a switching scenario, or a dual connection scenario, and the following descriptions are made by taking the switching scenario as an example.
  • the target sending device is a device that communicates with the UE after the UE performs the handover
  • the source sending device is the device that communicates with the UE before the UE performs the handover.
  • the data sending or receiving method provided by the embodiment of the present application may include the following steps:
  • the source base station sends a first data packet to the UE.
  • the present application does not limit the protocol layer for the source base station to perform the processing of the network coding function (the protocol layer may be referred to as the first protocol layer in the following).
  • the first protocol layer may be one of SDAP layer, PDCP layer or RLC layer.
  • the PDCP SDU received by the PDCP layer of the source base station is a data packet after SDAP performs the network coding function. Process to get PDCP PDU.
  • the PDCP layer of the source base station can perform the processing of the network coding function on the PDCP SDU, and perform PDCP layer processing to obtain the PDCP PDU and send it to the UE.
  • the process of performing network coding on PDCP SDU can refer to the description of Figure 7(a) and/or Figure 7(b) in this application, but it should not be understood as being limited to the use of Figure 7(a) and Figure 7(b)
  • the illustrated method performs the processing of network coding functions.
  • the first data packet may include the original data packet and/or the first redundant packet, or the first data packet may include the system packet and/or the first redundant packet, wherein the first redundant packet is based on
  • the original data packet is obtained by network coding operation, the system packet is obtained according to the original data packet, and the original data packet is obtained according to the original data.
  • the original data is the SDU of the first protocol layer to be processed by the network coding function.
  • the first data packet sent from the source base station to the UE may include a redundant packet EPkt1 and a redundant packet EPkt2.
  • the first data packet may include system packets EPkt1-EPkt4 and redundant packets EPkt5-EPkt6.
  • the UE receives the first data packet, and then executes the corresponding decoding process of the network coding function.
  • the decoding process of the UE shown in FIG. 7(a) and/or FIG. 7(b) please refer to the decoding process of the UE shown in FIG. 7(a) and/or FIG. 7(b) in this application description of.
  • the UE sends first information to the source base station, where the first information may be used to indicate a reception situation of the first data packet by the UE.
  • the first information may indicate the first SDU among the SDUs of the second protocol layer restored by the UE according to the first data packet, where the second protocol layer is, for example, a PDCP layer.
  • the SDUs of the second protocol layer correspond to the original data (that is, the SDUs of the first protocol layer), or in other words, the SDUs of the second protocol layer are all SDUs of the second protocol layer obtained according to the original data.
  • the first SDU is an SDU of the second protocol layer recovered by the UE according to the first data packet, and the first SDU includes part or all of the SDUs of the second protocol layer.
  • the first information may indicate information about the number of redundant packets to be received, and the redundant packets to be received may be used by the UE to recover original data. At this time, the first information may be used to request redundant packets to be received. For example, if there are n unrecovered first SDUs in the UE, the UE may use the first information to indicate that the number of redundant packets to be received is n, so as to request no less than n redundant packets.
  • the source base station can determine the number of the first data packets not received correctly by the UE according to the number information, and then the source base station can send the second redundant packets not less than the number to the target base station.
  • the first information may indicate information about the number of first data packets not received correctly (or received incorrectly) by the UE, and the source base station may send second redundant packets not less than the number to the target base station.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may also be used in a transmission scenario of the UM mode or the AM mode of the RLC layer.
  • the first information in the AM mode, may be an RLC status report, or a piece of feedback information other than the RLC status report, which is used to trigger the source base station to send the second data to the target base station.
  • the first information in the UM mode, may also be a PDCP status report sent by the UE to the source base station before switching to the target base station.
  • the source base station may send indication information to the UE before the UE is handed over to the target base station, for instructing the UE to send the PDCP status report to the source base station.
  • the first information may be other feedback information sent by the UE to the source base station before switching to the target base station.
  • the source base station receives the first information.
  • the source base station sends a second data packet to the target base station according to the first information, where the second data packet is used by the UE to restore the original data of the first data packet.
  • the type of the second data packet may include a redundant packet type, or in other words, the second data packet includes a second redundant packet, and the second redundant packet corresponds to the original data.
  • the second data packet is a redundant packet obtained through a network coding operation according to the original data.
  • the second redundant packet may be the same as the first redundant packet, or may be a redundant packet obtained by the source base station through a network coding operation after receiving the first information, wherein the encoding of the second redundant packet is obtained
  • the coefficient matrix may be the same as or different from the encoding coefficient matrix obtained from the first data packet, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the second data packet may further include a second SDU of the SDUs of the second protocol layer, the SDU of the second protocol layer corresponds to the SDU of the first protocol layer, and the second SDU does not include the first SDU.
  • the first SDU is the SDU of the second protocol layer recovered by the UE according to the first data packet, that is, the second SDU is the SDU of the second protocol layer not recovered by the UE according to the first data packet.
  • the second SDU may be the second PDCP SDU that has not been recovered by the UE among the PDCP SDUs.
  • the second data packet may also include a group of SDUs of the second protocol layer corresponding to the original data packet.
  • the SDUs of the second protocol layer of the group correspond to the same coding block (the convolutional code corresponds to the same coding window), that is, the SDUs of the first protocol layer corresponding to the SDUs of the second protocol layer are regarded as a group of SDUs Perform network encoding operations.
  • the group of SDUs of the second protocol layer includes SDUs of the second protocol layer not recovered by the UE according to the first data packet.
  • a group of SDUs of the second protocol layer may be a group of PDCP SDUs corresponding to the same coding block.
  • the target base station receives the second data packet.
  • the target base station sends a third data packet to the UE, and the third data packet is obtained according to the second data packet.
  • the third data packet is obtained according to the second data packet.
  • the second data packet is a PDCP SDU
  • the third data packet may be a PDCP PDU.
  • the target base station does not need to perform a network coding operation on the second redundant packet, for example, the target base station
  • the second data may be sent as a third data packet to the third data packet. If the second data packet includes a group of SDUs of the second protocol layer corresponding to the original data, the target base station may perform a network coding operation on the second redundant packet.
  • the UE may receive the third data packet, and restore the original data according to the third data packet.
  • the source base station can know the reception of the first data packet by the UE before the handover according to the first information, and the source base station can also send the second data packet to the target base station according to the first information, so that the UE can receive the first data packet from the target base station according to the first information.
  • the data packet received by the base station restores the original data corresponding to the first data packet, so that the UE can still obtain the original data before the handover after the handover, avoiding packet loss, and thus improving transmission reliability.
  • the first information may also indicate that the UE has successfully decoded the first data packet, and at this time the source base station does not need to send the second data packet to the target base station.
  • the source base station may not need to forward data to the target base station according to the first information or if the UE does not lose packets before the handover, so as to save inter-base station signaling and processing overhead.
  • the first data packet includes the system packet and the first redundant packet as an example.
  • the first data packet may also include the original data packet and the first redundant packet, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the base station deployment method with CU-DU separation is taken as an example.
  • the source base station in the following description can be replaced by the source gNB-CU, and the target base station can be replaced by the target gNB-CU.
  • the target base station can be replaced by the target gNB-CU.
  • Example 1 it is described by taking that both the source base station and the target base station support the network coding function, and the network coding function is located in the PDCP layer as an example.
  • the source base station sends coded packets including system packets and redundant packets to UE before handover
  • the target base station sends coded packets including system packets and redundant packets to UE after handover (that is, Fig. 7(b) Schematic scheme) as an example for illustration.
  • Example 1 may include the following steps 1 to 3:
  • Step 1 the source base station sends a PDCP PDU to the UE, and the PDCP PDU contains system packets or redundant packets.
  • the source base station performs network coding processing on multiple received PDCP SDUs (which can be referred to as original data) to generate coded packets (including system packets and redundant packets), and then adds PDCP headers to the generated coded packets to generate PDCP PDUs .
  • the source base station generates 4 coded packets (including 2 system packets and 2 redundant packets) after processing the received PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 with the network coding function, and then encodes the 4 After adding the PDCP header to the encoded packet, PDCP PDU0 (including system packet 1), PDCP PDU1 (including system packet 2), PDCP PDU2 (including redundant packet 1) and PDCP PDU3 (including redundant packet 2) are generated, that is, PDCP PDU0 ⁇ PDCP PDU3 as the first data packet. That is to say, there is a one-to-one correspondence between encoded packets and PDCP PDUs, that is, one encoded packet corresponds to one PDCP PDU.
  • Step 2 the source base station receives the first information sent by the UE.
  • the source base station receives the first information sent by the UE.
  • the UE sends the first information to the source base station.
  • the first information is used to indicate that the UE receives the encoded packet, and includes at least one of the following information:
  • Successfully decoded PDCP PDU0 ⁇ PDCP PDU3 indication information successfully received PDCP SDU information, number information of redundant packets to be received, number information of the first data packet (or PDCP PDU) received correctly, or incorrect Receive the number information of the first data packet (or PDCP PDU).
  • Step 3 the source base station forwards data to the target base station according to the first information.
  • forwarding means that the source base station forwards data to the target base station according to the first information.
  • the source base station forwards data to the target base station on the Xn interface (the forwarded data may be referred to as forwarded data, including but not limited to the second data packet, and may also include PDCP SDUs that have not been processed by the source base station at the PDCP layer, and/or, PDCP SDUs that have been processed by the network coding function on the source base station but not yet sent to the UE).
  • the type of forwarded data includes at least a redundant packet type, or in other words, the type of the second data packet in Example 1 is a redundant packet type.
  • the type of forwarded data in Example 1 may also include the SDU type.
  • the source base station forwards the second redundant packet to the target base station on the Xn interface.
  • the second redundant packet is the second data packet.
  • the source base station forwards the second redundant packet to the target base station according to the first information sent by the UE.
  • the forwarded second redundant packets may include redundant packets that have not been sent by the source base station to the UE.
  • the number of forwarded second redundant packets is greater than or equal to the number of redundant packets that the UE needs to receive after successfully decoding the original data.
  • the first information is information about the number of second redundant packets requested by the UE
  • the number of redundant packets that the UE needs to receive to successfully decode and restore the original data may be indicated by the first information.
  • the source base station may determine the number of second redundant packets that the UE needs to receive to successfully decode and restore the original data according to the first information.
  • the source base station can determine that the UE has successfully decoded and recovered the original data according to the first information and the number of first data packets that the source base station has sent to the UE.
  • the number of second redundant packets that need to be received is also required.
  • the source base station generates 4 coded packets (including 2 system packets and 2 redundant packets) after processing the received PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 with the network coding function, and then encodes the 4 After adding the PDCP header to the encoded packet, PDCP PDU0 (including system packet 1), PDCP PDU1 (including system packet 2), PDCP PDU2 (including redundant packet 1) and PDCP PDU3 (including redundant packet 2) are generated, PDCP PDU0 ⁇ PDCP PDU3 is the first data packet, or called a coded packet.
  • the UE can successfully decode and recover the original data PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3, but since the UE only receives PDCP PDU0 and PDCP PDU2, that is: the UE only successfully receives 2 encoded packets (ie: System package 1 and redundant package 1), only one coded package is needed to successfully decode and recover PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3.
  • the first information sent by the UE to the source base station may include: information of requesting 1 redundant packet, information of correctly receiving 2 encoded packets, or information of incorrectly receiving 2 encoded packets.
  • the source base station does not forward PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 on the Xn interface, but forwards the second redundant packet obtained by performing network coding function processing on this group of PDCP SDUs, for example: forwarded
  • the second redundant packet is a redundant packet generated after processing the network coding function according to PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2, and PDCP SDU3 after receiving the first information, and is called redundant packet 3.
  • the redundant packet 3 is a redundant packet that has not been sent by the source base station, and is different from both the redundant packet 1 and the redundant packet 2.
  • the first information may also be DDDS feedback (only applicable to the source base station adopting CU-DU separation architecture) or RLC status report, then the source base station can forward the redundant
  • the remaining packet 3 is a second redundant packet that has not been successfully received by the UE or a redundant packet to be received by the UE.
  • the first information may include information of the first data packet correctly received by the UE, and/or information of the first data packet unsuccessfully received by the UE.
  • the DDDS feedback may include information about successful reception of PDCH PDU0 and PDCP PDU2, information about unsuccessful reception of PDCP PDU1 and PDCP PDU3, etc., and the source base station may learn from the DDDS feedback that the UE has not After redundant packet 2 is successfully received, the second redundant packet forwarded by the source base station to the target base station may be redundant packet 2 (that is, the redundant packet contained in PDCP PDU3).
  • the source base station can also forward the PDCP SDU to the target base station on the Xn interface.
  • the PDCP SDU forwarded by the Xn interface includes the PDCP SDU that has not been processed by the PDCP layer at the source base station, and/or includes the PDCP SDU that has been processed by the network coding function on the source base station but has not yet been sent to the UE.
  • the source base station has not yet performed PDCP layer processing on the received PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5, and PDCP SDU6 (PDCP layer processing refers to associated PDCP SN, header compression, encryption/integrity protection processing, or adding PDCP headers, etc.
  • the source base station performs network coding function processing on the received PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5 and PDCP SDU6 but has not yet generated a PDCP PDU, or, the source base station processes the received PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5 and PDCP SDU6 performs network coding function processing and adds PDCP header to generate PDCP PDU, but the generated PDCP PDU has not been sent to UE, then the source base station can send PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5 and PDCP SDU6.
  • the third data packet may include PDCP PDU4 generated by the target base station.
  • the source base station may forward the second redundant packet and the PDCP SDU to the target base station on the Xn interface.
  • the target base station does not need to perform the processing of the network coding function, and for the PDCP SDU, the target base station needs to perform the processing of the network coding function.
  • the source base station may send first indication information to the target base station, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the type of the second data packet is a redundant packet type.
  • the first indication information can be used to indicate that the type of the second data packet is a redundant packet type, and the target base station can ignore the second data packet Perform network encoding processing.
  • the first indication information may be used to indicate which forwarded data requires the target base station to perform the processing of the network coding function, or used to indicate which forwarded data does not need to perform the processing of the network coding function.
  • the target base station may ignore performing network encoding processing on the second data packet.
  • the first indication information is 1-bit indication information. When the value of the indication information is 0, it means that the target base station needs to perform network coding function processing on the forwarded data. When the value of the indication information is 1, it means that the target base station is not required. The base station performs the processing of the network coding function on the forwarded data.
  • the source base station may carry the first indication information in the GTP header field of the GTP tunnel. For example: only when the source base station forwards the second redundant packet to the target base station, the GTP header field of the GTP tunnel carries the first indication information; when forwarding the PDCP SDU, the GTP header field of the GTP tunnel does not carry the first indication information. Instructions.
  • the identifier of the GTP tunnel (such as the GTP TEID) may also be sent by the source sending device to the target sending device.
  • the source sending device sends the corresponding relationship to the target sending device, the corresponding relationship including the correspondence between the GTP tunnel identifier and the first indication information, so that the target sending device knows that the first indication information is used to indicate which second Whether the packet needs to be processed by performing network encoding functions.
  • the source sending device sends an XnAp message to the target sending device, which may carry the identifier of the GTP tunnel and first indication information corresponding to the identifier of the GTP tunnel, or carry the corresponding relationship.
  • the source base station may also send third indication information to the target base station, where the third indication information is used by the target base station to determine the information of the first coding block to be processed by the network coding function.
  • the third indication information is a block identifier (identifier, ID).
  • the third indication information may be used to indicate the information of the first coding block that is processed by performing the network coding function on the target base station.
  • the source base station divides, concatenates, and adds padding to PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2, and PDCP SDU3 to obtain multiple original data packets of equal size, and converts these original data packets
  • a coded block is formed for encoding operation and coded packet header is added to generate a coded packet, wherein the coded packet header of the generated coded packet will carry the corresponding coded block identifier (block ID), for example: block ID 0, then when the UE switches , the source base station sends the third indication information including block ID 1 to the target base station.
  • block ID coded block identifier
  • the target base station performs network coding processing on PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5, and PDCP SDU6 to generate a coded packet, and the coded packet header of the generated coded packet will carry the corresponding coded block identifier block ID1.
  • the UE can only jointly decode the coded packets belonging to the same block ID to ensure successful decoding, that is, only the coded packets belonging to block ID 0 can be jointly decoded to recover PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3, coded packets belonging to block ID 1 can be jointly decoded to recover PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5 and PDCP SDU6.
  • the encoded block identifier of the encoded packet may conflict with the encoded block identifier of the redundant packet from the source base station, causing the UE to decode fail.
  • the third indication information may be used to indicate the information of the last coding block processed by the network coding function on the source base station, and the target base station learns that the network coding function is executed on the target base station according to the third indication information. The number of the first encoded chunk processed by the encode function.
  • PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2, and PDCP SDU3 on the source base station perform one or more of the processes of segmentation, concatenation, and padding to obtain multiple original data packets of equal size, and these original data packets
  • a coding block is formed to perform coding operations and a coded packet header is added to generate a coded packet, wherein the coded packet header of the generated coded packet will carry the corresponding coded block identifier, for example: block ID 0, when the UE switches, the source base station will The third indication information including block ID 0 is sent to the target base station.
  • the target base station performs network coding processing on PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5, and PDCP SDU6 to generate a coded packet, and the coded packet header of the generated coded packet will carry the corresponding coded block identifier block ID1.
  • the UE can only jointly decode the coded packets belonging to the same block ID to ensure successful decoding, that is, only the coded packets belonging to block ID 0 can be jointly decoded to recover PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3, coded packets belonging to block ID 1 can be jointly decoded to recover PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5 and PDCP SDU6.
  • the third indication information may be carried in the existing SN state transition message, or the third indication information may also be carried in the GTP header field and sent together with the forwarded data.
  • the scheme in which the source base station and the target base station respectively send encoded packets to the UE before and after the handover is taken as an example for illustration (that is, the method illustrated in FIG. 7( b ), where the encoded packets include system packets and redundant packets).
  • Example 1 is also applicable to the scheme in which the source base station and the target base station respectively send the original data packet and the redundant packet to the UE before and after the handover (ie the scheme shown in FIG. 7( a )) or other network coding schemes.
  • the system packet in the above description needs to be replaced with the original data packet, and the coded packet is replaced with the original data packet and the redundant packet.
  • Example 2 it is described by taking that both the source base station and the target base station support the network coding function, and the network coding function is located in the PDCP layer as an example.
  • the source gNB-CU sends the encoded packet including the system packet and the redundant packet to the UE before the handover
  • the target gNB-CU sends the encoded packet including the system packet and the redundant packet to the UE after the handover (that is, 7(b) shows the solution) as an example to illustrate.
  • the second data packet includes the second PDCP SDU, which is the PDCP SDU that the UE has not successfully recovered before the handover, or in other words, the second PDCP SDU does not include the PDCP SDU that the UE has successfully recovered before the handover. SDUs.
  • the forwarded data in Example 2 includes PDCP SDUs that have not been processed by the source base station at the PDCP layer, and/or includes second PDCP SDUs.
  • the source base station can process the received PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 with the network coding function to generate 4 coded packets (including 2 system packets and 2 redundant packets) , and then add the PDCP header to the 4 coded packets to generate PDCP PDU0 (including system packet 1), PDCP PDU1 (including system packet 2), PDCP PDU2 (including redundant packet 1) and PDCP PDU3 (including redundant packet 2) , namely PDCP PDU0 ⁇ PDCP PDU3 as the first data packet.
  • PDCP PDU0 contains system package 1
  • system package 1 contains complete PDCP SDU1 Therefore, UE can successfully recover PDCP SDU1 through received PDCP PDU0.
  • the UE can successfully decode and recover the original data PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3, but since the UE only receives PDCP PDU0 and PDCP PDU2, that is: the UE only successfully receives 2 encoded packets (ie: System package 1 and redundancy package 1), therefore, the UE cannot recover PDCP SDU 2 and PDCP SDU 3, then the first SDU is PDCP SDU 2 and PDCP SDU 3.
  • the first information sent by the UE to the source base station may include the information of the PDCP SDU1 successfully recovered by the UE, or the information of the PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 not recovered by the UE.
  • the source gNB-CU only forwards PDCP SDU 2 and PDCP SDU 3 to the target gNB-CU, that is to say, the second PDCP SDU includes PDCP SDU 2 and PDCP SDU 3.
  • the source gNB-CU can also forward PDCP SDU 4, PDCP SDU 5 and PDCP SDU 6 to the target gNB-CU.
  • the forwarding processing of PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5 and PDCP SDU6 is the same as that in Example 1, and will not be repeated here.
  • the third data packet may include PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5 generated by the target base station.
  • the target gNB-CU receives all PDCP SDUs from the Xn interface, it handles different PDCP SDUs differently.
  • PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 do not require the target base station to perform network coding function processing (because PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 need to be processed as a group to perform network coding function processing, but the source base station does not forward PDCP SDU1)
  • the target base station can obtain PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5 shown in Figure 11 according to PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3, and PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5 and PDCP SDU6 require the target base station to perform network coding function processing, and the PDCP PDU obtained after network coding processing includes PDCP PDU6 ⁇ PDCP PDU9.
  • the source base station when the source base station forwards data to the target base station, it needs to additionally indicate whether the PDCP SDU forwarded through the Xn interface needs to perform network coding function processing.
  • the source base station sends the second indication information to the target base station.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the target base station performs network coding function processing on the PDCP SDU forwarded through the Xn interface.
  • the second indication information may be displayed indication information, for example, the second indication information is used to indicate whether to perform network coding function processing on the PDCP SDU forwarded through the Xn interface.
  • the second indication information may also be implicit indication information, for example: the second indication information is a block ID, and for the target base station, the processing of the network coding function is only performed on the forwarded PDCP SDU carrying the second indication information , for the forwarded PDCP SDU that does not carry the second indication information, the processing of the network coding function is not performed.
  • the second indication information can also be used to indicate whether the type of the second data packet is an SDU type, and if the second data packet is the second PDCP SDU, the second indication information can indicate that the type of the second data packet is an SDU type , correspondingly, when the second indication information indicates that the type of the second data packet is the SDU type, the target base station does not need to perform the processing of the network coding function on the second data packet.
  • the second indication information may be carried in the GTP header field of the Xn interface.
  • the second indication information when the source gNB-CU forwards PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 to the target gNB-CU, the second indication information is carried in the GTP header field to indicate that PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 do not need to perform network coding functions on the target base station
  • the second indication information is carried in the GTP header field to indicate that PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5 and PDCP SDU6 need to perform network Processing of encoding functions.
  • the second indication information is carried in the GTP header field to indicate that PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 do not need to perform network coding function processing on the target base station, and the source
  • the GTP header field does not carry the second indication information
  • the target base station does not carry the second indication information for PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5, and PDCP SDU6 performs network coding function processing by default.
  • the second indication information is not carried in the GTP header field, and the target base station does not carry out the PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 that do not carry the second indication information by default.
  • the second indication information is carried in the GTP header field to indicate that PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5 and PDCP SDU6 are on the target base station Processing required to perform network coding functions.
  • the second indication information may indicate the information of the initial PDCP SDU that is processed by the network coding function on the target base station.
  • the information of the initial PDCP SDU includes the SN number corresponding to the PDCP SDU.
  • the target base station starts to perform network coding function processing from PDCP SDU 4, and the second indication information includes the SN number corresponding to PDCP SDU4, then the target base station does not need to perform network coding function processing on PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 .
  • the source base station may also send third indication information to the target base station, for the target base station to determine the third indication information for performing network coding function processing.
  • Information about an encoded block For an implementation manner of the third indication information, reference may be made to the implementation manner of the aforementioned third indication information in Example 1, which will not be repeated here.
  • the third indication information may be used to indicate the number of the first encoding block that is processed by the network coding function on the target base station, or the third indication information may be used to indicate the last code block that is processed by the network coding function on the source base station. The number of the encoded block.
  • Example 2 since the PDCP PDUs received by the UE from the target base station include PDCP PDUs processed by the network coding function (PDCP PDU6-PDCP PDU9 as shown in Figure 11) and PDCP PDUs not processed by the network coding function (as shown in Figure 11 PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5 shown), so in order for the UE to distinguish the received PDCP PDU, the target base station needs to send the fifth indication information to the UE, and the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the PDCP PDU has passed the network coding function processing, or used to indicate whether the PDCP PDU needs to perform network decoding processing, so that the UE can perform different processing on the received PDCP PDU.
  • the network coding function PDCP PDU6-PDCP PDU9 as shown in Figure 11
  • PDCP PDUs not processed by the network coding function as shown in Figure 11 PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5 shown
  • the fifth indication information may be a display indication, that is: display indicating whether the PDCP PDU has been processed by the network coding function, or display indicating whether the PDCP PDU needs to perform network decoding processing; or, the fifth indication
  • the information can be an implicit indication, that is, indicating that the effective payload of the PDCP PDU carries a coded packet or a PDCP SDU.
  • the target base station may add indication information (that is, fifth indication information) in the PDCP header field, which is used to indicate whether the PDCP PDU needs to perform network decoding processing.
  • the fifth indication information may be 1-bit information, for example, when the value of the 1-bit information is 0, it is used to indicate that the PDCP PDU needs to perform network decoding processing, and when the value of the 1-bit information is 1, use It is used to indicate that the PDCP PDU does not need to perform network decoding processing.
  • the target base station does not process the network coding function for PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3, and can use the existing mechanism to generate corresponding PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5 after PDCP layer processing of PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 and send them to
  • PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5 may carry fifth indication information indicating that they have not been processed by the network coding function.
  • the target base station can also process PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5, and PDCP SDU6 to generate encoded packets through network encoding, and then add PDCP headers to the encoded packets to generate corresponding PDCP PDU6 ⁇ PDCP SDU9 and send them to the UE.
  • PDCP PDU6 ⁇ PDCP SDU9 can be Carry the fifth indication information indicating that the network coding function has been processed, and correspondingly, the UE learns whether the received PDCP PDU needs to perform network decoding processing according to the fifth indication information carried in the PDCP header field, if the indication is not If it is necessary to perform network decoding processing, the UE will use the existing mechanism to directly restore the PDCP PDU to the corresponding PDCP SDU. If it is indicated that network decoding processing is required, the UE will restore the PDCP PDU after being processed by the network decoding function. Output the corresponding PDCP SDU.
  • the UE receives PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5 sent by the target base station, wherein the fifth indication information carried in the PDCP header field indicates that PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5 do not need to perform network decoding processing, and the UE also receives PDCP PDU6 sent by the target base station ⁇ PDCP SDU9, wherein, the fifth indication information carried in the PDCP header field of PDCP PDU6 ⁇ PDCP SDU9 indicates that the PDCP PDU needs to perform network decoding processing.
  • the UE receives the PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5 sent by the target base station, wherein, if the fifth indication information is not carried in the PDCP header field, the UE defaults that PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5 do not need to perform network decoding processing; PDCP PDU6 ⁇ PDCP SDU9, wherein, if the fifth indication information carried in the PDCP header field of PDCP PDU6 ⁇ PDCP SDU9 indicates that network decoding needs to be performed, the UE needs to perform network decoding processing on PDCP PDU6 ⁇ PDCP SDU9 .
  • the UE receives the PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5 sent by the target base station, wherein, the fifth indication information carried in the PDCP header field, the UE does not need to perform network decoding processing on the PDCP PDU4 and PDCP PDU5; the UE receives the PDU sent by the target base station PDCP PDU6 ⁇ PDCP SDU9, wherein, if the PDCP header field of PDCP PDU6 ⁇ PDCP SDU9 does not carry the fifth indication information, the UE defaults that PDCP PDU6 ⁇ PDCP SDU9 needs to perform network decoding processing.
  • the UE may also determine whether to perform network decoding on the PDCP PDU from the target base station according to the size of the PDCP PDU received from the target base station. Because the sizes of different coded packets are the same, the PDCP PDU sizes after adding PDCP headers to different coded packets are also the same, but the PDCP SDU sizes are generally different, resulting in different PDCP PDU sizes directly generated by different PDCP SDUs. of. If the size of the PDCP PDU received by the UE is the same, it can be considered that the payload of the PDCP PDU carries an encoded packet, and it needs to perform network decoding on the PDCP PDU.
  • the UE receives PDCP PDUs of the same size and receives other PDCP PDUs whose size is different from these PDCP PDUs, it can consider that the effective payload of the other PDCP PDUs carries PDCP SDUs, and there is no need to check Other PDCP PDUs perform network decoding processing, and it is still necessary to perform network decoding processing on PDCP PDUs of the same size.
  • Example 2 is illustrated by taking the scheme that the source base station and the target base station respectively send coded packets including system packets and redundant packets to UE before and after handover (that is, the method illustrated in FIG. 7( b )).
  • Example 2 is also applicable to the scheme in which the source base station and the target base station respectively send the original data packet and the redundant packet to the UE before and after the handover (ie the scheme shown in FIG. 7( a )) or other network coding schemes.
  • the system packet in the above description needs to be replaced with the original data packet, and the coded packet is replaced with the original data packet and the redundant packet.
  • Example 3 the source base station and the target base station both support the network coding function, and the network coding function is located in the PDCP layer as an example for illustration.
  • the source gNB-CU sends the encoded packet including the system packet and the redundant packet to the UE before the handover
  • the target gNB-CU sends the encoded packet including the system packet and the redundant packet to the UE after the handover (that is, 7(b) shows the solution) as an example to illustrate.
  • the second data packet includes a set of PDCP SDUs corresponding to the same coded block.
  • at least one PDCP SDU in the group of PDCP SDUs is not recovered by the UE according to the data packet received from the source base station before the handover, or in other words, the group of PDCP SDUs includes the second PDCP SDU.
  • the source base station can forward the PDCP SDU to the target base station on the Xn interface, wherein the PDCP SDU forwarded through the Xn interface includes the PDCP SDU that has not been processed by the source base station at the PDCP layer, and/or the group of PDCP SDUs.
  • the source base station performs one or more of the processing of segmentation, concatenation, and padding on the received PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2, and PDCP SDU3 to obtain multiple original data packets of equal size, and converts these
  • the original data packet constitutes an encoding block for encoding operation and adding the encoded packet header to generate 4 encoded packets (including 2 system packets and 2 redundant packets), and then add the PDCP header operation to the 4 encoded packets to generate PDCP PDU0 ( Including system package 1), PDCP PDU1 (including system package 2), PDCP PDU2 (including redundant package 1) and PDCP PDU3 (including redundant package 2), that is, the first data packet includes PDCP PDU0 ⁇ PDCP PDU3.
  • the coding block corresponds to PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3. Since the UE only successfully receives PDCP PDU0 and PDCP PDU2, PDCP PDU0 contains system package 1, and the system package 1 contains complete PDCP SDU1, therefore, UE can successfully recover PDCP SDU1 through received PDCP PDU0.
  • the UE Assuming that the UE successfully receives 3 encoded packets, it can successfully decode and recover the original data PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3, but since the UE only receives PDCP PDU0 and PDCP PDU2, that is: the UE only successfully receives 2 encoded packets (ie: System package 1 and redundant package 1), therefore, the UE cannot recover PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU 3, that is, the UE has not successfully decoded and recovered all the PDCP SDUs corresponding to the coded block.
  • 2 encoded packets ie: System package 1 and redundant package 1
  • the source gNB-CU needs to forward PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU 2, and PDCP SDU 3 to the target gNB-CU, and the target base station can pass the network coding function according to PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU 2, and PDCP SDU 3. Process and generate PDCP PDU0 ⁇ PDCP PDU3.
  • the source gNB-CU also needs to forward PDCP SDU 4, PDCP SDU 5 and PDCP SDU 6 to the target gNB-CU, and the target base station can generate PDCP PDU4 ⁇ PDCP PDU7.
  • the forwarding processing of PDCP SDU4, PDCP SDU5 and PDCP SDU6 is the same as that in Example 1, and will not be repeated here. It should be understood that, for the example shown in FIG. 12, the third data packet may include PDCP PDU0-PDCP PDU3 generated by the target base station.
  • PDCP SDU1 can be successfully recovered according to the PDCP PDU0 sent by the source base station.
  • the UE successfully recovers PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 according to the PDCP PDU0 ⁇ PDCP PDU3 sent by the target base station.
  • the UE In order to avoid repeated submission of data packets (that is, to prevent the PDCP layer of the UE from repeatedly submitting PDCP SDU1 to the upper layer), the UE needs to delete the data related to the coding blocks corresponding to PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2, and PDCP SDU3 received from the source base station, including The UE deletes at least one of the following data: the PDCP SDU recovered by the UE based on the PDCP PDU received from the source base station, the PDCP PDU corresponding to PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 received by the UE from the source base station, or the UE Encoded packets contained in PDCP PDUs corresponding to PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3 received from the source base station.
  • the PDCP SDU recovered by the UE according to the PDCP PDU received from the source base station may be a PDCP SDU directly recovered from the PDCP PDU, or may be a PDCP SDU recovered by decoding the encoded packets contained in the PDCP PDU.
  • the UE deletes at least one of the following data: PDCP SDU1 recovered from PDCP PDU0 received from the source base station, PDCP PDU0 and PDCP PDU2 received from the source base station, and corresponding to PDCP PDU0 received from the source base station Redundant package 1 corresponding to system package 1 and PDCP PDU2.
  • the UE may receive indication information (which may be referred to as fourth indication information), and the indication information may be used to instruct the UE to delete data that is duplicated with all or part of the data in a group of PDCP SDUs.
  • the fourth indication information may be used to indicate at least one of the repeated PDCP PDU that needs to be deleted by the UE, the encoded packet corresponding to the PDCP PDU, or the PDCP SDU recovered from the system packet and/or redundant packet corresponding to the PDCP PDU.
  • the indication information may be generated by the source base station, or may be generated by the target base station.
  • the fourth indication information may be carried in an RRC message.
  • the fourth indication information includes a block ID (or a list of block IDs), and the UE can determine the encoded packets that need to be deleted according to the indication information. For example, it is necessary to delete the block ID carried in the encoded packet that is less than or equal to the block ID carried in the indication information, so that the UE deletes these encoded packets, the PDCP SDU successfully recovered from these encoded packets, or the PDCP PDU corresponding to these encoded packets at least one.
  • the fourth indication information includes PDCP SN (or PDCP SN list). Then the UE can determine the PDCP PDUs that need to be deleted according to the indication information, where the deleted PDCP PDUs include the PDCP PDUs corresponding to the SN received from the source base station, so that the UE can delete these PDCP PDUs and the encoded packets corresponding to these PDCP PDUs , or at least one of the PDCP SDUs successfully recovered from these encoded packets.
  • the fourth indication information includes initial PDCP SN information and a bitmap (bitmap).
  • the starting PDCP SN is used to indicate the first PDCP PDU that needs to be deleted by the UE among the PDCP PDUs received from the source base station, and the bitmap can be used to indicate the PDCP PDUs that need to be deleted after the starting PDCP PDU. Therefore, the UE can delete these PDCP PDUs, the encoded packets corresponding to these PDCP PDUs, or at least one of the successfully recovered PDCP SDUs through these encoded packets.
  • the fourth indication information includes starting PDCP SN and ending PDCP SN information.
  • the starting PDCP SN is used to indicate the first PDCP PDU that the UE needs to delete among the PDCP PDUs received from the source base station
  • the ending PDCP SN is used to indicate the last PDCP PDU that the UE needs to delete among the PDCP PDUs received from the source base station.
  • a PDCP PDU After receiving the indication information, the UE will delete all PDCP PDUs received from the source base station between the first PDCP PDU and the last PDCP PDU. Therefore, the UE can delete these PDCP PDUs, the encoded packets corresponding to these PDCP PDUs, or at least one of the successfully recovered PDCP SDUs through these encoded packets.
  • the source base station divides PDCP SDU1, PDCP SDU2, and PDCP SDU3 into one or more of the processes of segmentation, concatenation, and padding to obtain multiple original data packets of equal size, and converts these original data packets
  • the source base station generates a PDCP PDU after adding a PDCP header to the coded packet, and sends the PDCP PDU to the UE.
  • the UE successfully receives PDCP PDU0 and PDCP PDU2 sent by the source base station.
  • the fourth indication information the UE will delete at least one of the following data:
  • the source base station forwards the PDCP SDU to the target base station on the Xn interface, wherein the PDCP SDU forwarded through the Xn interface includes the PDCP SDU that has not been processed by the source base station at the PDCP layer, and/or, and/ Or, a set of PDCP SDUs corresponding to the same coded block.
  • the second data packet is a group of PDCP SDUs corresponding to the same coding block, at least one PDCP SDU in the group of PDCP SDUs is not recovered by the UE according to the data packet received from the source base station before the handover, or That is, the group of PDCP SDUs includes the second PDCP SDU.
  • Example 4 the PDCP SDU sent by the source base station to the UE and the PDCP SDU forwarded by the source base station to the target base station carry an identifier (which can be called the first sequence number) for identifying the PDCP SDU, that is: it can be considered
  • the source base station forms a PDCP SDU' from the PDCP SDU and its corresponding first sequence number, sends the PDCP SDU' as a PDCP SDU to the UE after processing, and forwards the PDCP SDU' to the target base station on the Xn interface, and the target base station After obtaining the PDCP PDU according to the PDCP SDU', the PDCP PDU is forwarded to the UE.
  • the PDCP SDU' obtained by the UE according to the PDCP PDU from the target base station carries the first sequence number.
  • the first sequence number can be represented by SN', that is, PDCP SDU' is composed of PDCP SDU and SN'.
  • the UE can identify whether the PDCP SDU' from the target base station and the PDCP SDU' from the source base station are duplicated according to the SN'. If the UE obtains duplicate PDCP SDU's from the source base station and the target base station respectively, the UE deletes the duplicated PDCP SDUs 'to prevent the UE from submitting duplicate PDCP SDUs to the upper layer'. It can be seen that in this example, it is not necessary to use the fourth indication information to instruct the UE which data to delete.
  • Example 4 there are two possible implementations in Example 4:
  • the source base station can add a header field for each PDCP SDU to carry the SN' associated with the SDU to generate a PDCP SDU'.
  • the source base station forwards the PDCP SDU' to the target base station through the GTP tunnel.
  • the target base station processes the PDCP SDU' using the existing PDCP SDU processing mechanism, and sends data to the UE.
  • the UE performs duplicate packet detection according to the SN' carried in the PDCP SDU' from the source base station and the target base station respectively.
  • the UE finds that the SN' carried in the PDCP SDU' from the source base station is the same as the SN' carried in the PDCP SDU' from the target base station, it can delete the duplicate PDCP SDU'.
  • the third data packet may include PDCP PDU0-PDCP PDU3 generated by the target base station.
  • the source base station encapsulates the PDCP SDU in a GTP tunnel and sends it to the target base station, and carries the SN' corresponding to the PDCP SDU in the GTP header field.
  • the target base station extracts the PDCP SDU and the corresponding SN’ from the GTP tunnel, generates the PDCP SDU’ from the PDCP SDU and the corresponding SN’, and uses the existing PDCP SDU processing mechanism to send data to the UE.
  • the UE performs duplicate packet detection according to the SN' carried in the PDCP SDU' from the source base station and the target base station respectively.
  • the UE can identify the repeated PDCP SDU in the PDCP SDU from the source base station and the PDCP SDU from the target base station according to the value of the SN'. If the SN' carried in the GTP header field of the PDCP SDU from the source base station is found to be the same as If the SN' carried in the GTP header field of the PDCP SDU' from the target base station is the same, the PDCP SDU can be deleted.
  • the third data packet may include PDCP PDU0-PDCP PDU3 generated by the target base station.
  • Example 3 and example 4 are illustrated by taking the scheme that the source base station and the target base station respectively send coded packets including system packets and redundant packets to the UE before and after handover (that is, the method illustrated in FIG. 7( b )).
  • Example 3 and Example 4 are also applicable to the scheme in which the source base station and the target base station respectively send the original data packet and the redundant packet to the UE before and after the handover (that is, the scheme shown in FIG. 7( a )) or other network coding schemes.
  • the system packet in the above description needs to be replaced with the original data packet, and the coded packet is replaced with the original data packet and the redundant packet.
  • Example 5 the source base station supports the network coding function, but the target base station does not support the network coding function.
  • Example 5 uses an example where the network coding function is located above the PDCP layer.
  • the network coding function is located in a newly introduced protocol layer between the PDCP layer and the SDAP layer, or the network coding function is located in the SDAP layer, or the network coding function is located in the SDAP layer. Functionality sits on top of the SDAP layer.
  • the solution that is, the method illustrated in FIG. 7( b )
  • the source gNB-CU sends a coded packet including a system packet and a redundant packet to the UE before the handover is taken as an example for illustration.
  • the network coding function since the network coding function is located above the PDCP layer, the PDCP SDU received by the source base station has been processed by the network coding function.
  • the second data packet sent by the source base station to the target base station through the Xn interface during the UE handover process is a PDCP SDU that has not been successfully received by the UE. Therefore, the PDCP SDU forwarded through the Xn interface is processed by the network coding function, and the target base station The base station performs PDCP layer processing on the PDCP SDUs that have not been successfully received by the UE to generate a PDCP PDU and send it to the UE.
  • the target base station since the target base station does not support the processing of the network coding function, the PDCP SDUs received by the target base station from the core network have not been processed by the network coding function, and the target base station performs PDCP layer processing on these PDCP SDUs to generate PDCP PDUs and send them to the UE.
  • the S-gNB-CU may send the PDCP SDU2 and the PDCP SDU3 to the T-gNB-CU.
  • the third data packet in this example includes the PDCP PDU obtained according to PDCP SDU2 and PDCP SDU3.
  • the target base station can send the fifth indication information to the UE.
  • the implementation of the fifth indication information can refer to Example 2. The description of the fifth indication information will not be repeated here.
  • the receiving device can know whether the PDCP PDU has been processed by the network coding according to the fifth indication information, so as to decide whether the PDCP PDU The corresponding decoding processing of the network coding is performed to correctly receive the data in the third data packet.
  • decoding the PDCP PDU includes decoding the PDCP SDU after obtaining the PDCP SDU according to the PDCP PDU.
  • This embodiment is also applicable to the scenario where the network coding function is located in the PDCP layer, that is, the source base station supports the network coding function, and the target base station does not support the network coding function.
  • the source base station is on the Xn interface. Forward redundant packets to the target base station, and the PDCP SDU received by the target base station from the core network is not processed by the network coding function to generate a PDCP PDU and send it to the UE.
  • the UE also needs to distinguish the two types of PDCP SDUs received from the target base station, and the target base station needs to send the fifth indication information to the UE.
  • Example 5 uses the scheme in which the UE receives coded packets as an example to illustrate (that is, the method illustrated in FIG. 7( b ), where the coded packets include system packets and redundant packets). This embodiment is also applicable to the scheme in which the UE receives the original data packet and the redundant packet (that is, the scheme shown in FIG. 7(a)) or other network coding schemes. Let me repeat. In the solution for the UE to receive the original data packet and the redundant packet, it is necessary to replace the coded packet in the above description with the original data packet and the redundant packet, which will not be repeated here.
  • the source base station can also transfer the configuration information of the network coding function (including network coding related parameter information) and other related information to the UE handover preparation process. Sent to the target base station so that the target base station uses the information for processing of the network coding function.
  • the network coding-related parameter information may include the network coding type, the size of the coding block, the size of the system packet, the size of the original data packet, the number of system packets, the number of the original data packet, and the number of redundant packets , selection of coding coefficients, or at least one of convolution depth. If the source base station and the target base station use the same parameters to process the network coding function, the UE can use the same set of parameters to decode the encoded packets from the source base station and the target base station respectively, so as to improve decoding efficiency.
  • the target base station may send sixth indication information to the source base station, which is used to indicate whether the target base station supports the network coding function. If the target base station supports the network coding function, the source base station and the target base station may implement any one of the above examples 1 to 4. If the target base station does not support the network coding function, the source base station and the target base station can implement the solution shown in example 5 above.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device for implementing the above functions implemented by the source sending device, the receiving device and/or the target sending device.
  • the device may include the structure shown in FIG. 16 and/or FIG. 17 .
  • a communication device may include a transceiver module 1620 and a processing module 1610 , and the transceiver module 1620 and the processing module 1610 are coupled to each other.
  • the communication apparatus may be used to execute any one or more of the source sending device (or source base station), receiving device (or UE) or target sending device (or target base station) shown in FIGS. 9 to 15 above.
  • the transceiver module 1620 can be used to support the communication device to communicate, and the transceiver module 1620 can also be called a communication unit, a communication interface, a transceiver module or a transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may have a wireless communication function, for example, be able to communicate with UE through wireless communication, and may have a wired communication function, for supporting communication devices to communicate through a wired communication interface (such as an Xn interface).
  • the processing module 1610 may be configured to support the communication device to execute the steps performed by any one or more of the source sending device, the receiving device, or the target sending device shown in the above method embodiments, and some steps not shown in the above embodiments Steps, the execution steps include but are not limited to: generating information and messages sent by the transceiver module 1620, and/or performing demodulation and decoding processing on signals received by the transceiver module 1620, and the like.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be configured to send the first data packet to the receiving device.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may also receive first information from the receiving device.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may also send the second data packet to the target sending device according to the first information.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is further configured to send at least one of the following: the first indication information to the fourth indication information, the configuration information of the network coding function, or the GTP data packet carrying the second data packet
  • the identifier of the tunnel corresponds to the first indication information of the GTP tunnel.
  • the transceiving module 1620 is further configured to receive at least one of the following: first information or sixth indication information.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be configured to receive the first data packet from the source sending device and send the first information.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is further configured to receive a third data packet from the target sending device.
  • the transceiving module 1620 is further configured to receive at least one of the following: fourth indication information or fifth indication information.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be configured to receive the second data packet from the source sending device and send the third data packet.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is further configured to receive the third data packet from the target sending device, and/or to receive the identifier of the GTP tunnel carrying the second data packet and the first indication information corresponding to the identifier of the GTP tunnel.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is further configured to send sixth indication information.
  • the transceiving module 1620 is further configured to receive at least one of the following: first indication information to fourth indication information, or configuration information of a network coding function.
  • FIG. 17 shows a schematic structural diagram of another communication apparatus, which is used to perform the actions performed by at least one of the source sending device, the receiving device, or the target sending device provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • a communications device may include a processor and a memory.
  • the processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control communication devices, execute software programs, process data of software programs, and the like.
  • Memory is primarily used to store software programs and data.
  • the communication interface is mainly used for communication between the source sending device and the target sending device.
  • the above communication device may also include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit for communicating through wireless communication.
  • the source sending device or the target sending device can send data to the receiving device through the antenna and the radio frequency circuit, and the receiving device can receive data through the antenna and the radio frequency circuit. data.
  • the processor of the communication device can also perform baseband processing on the data to be sent, and output the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. form to send out.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and Do something with that data.
  • the antenna and/or radio frequency circuit having a transceiver function may be regarded as a transceiver unit of the communication device.
  • the transceiver unit may also include a communication interface and the like.
  • the transceiver unit may be a functional unit capable of transmitting and receiving functions; or, the transceiver unit may also include two functional units, namely a receiving unit capable of receiving and a transmitting unit capable of transmitting.
  • a processor having processing functions may also be considered as a processing unit of a communication device.
  • the communication device may include a transceiver unit 1710 and a processing unit 1720 .
  • the transceiver unit may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like.
  • a processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and the like.
  • the device in the transceiver unit 1710 for realizing the receiving function may be regarded as a receiving unit
  • the device in the transceiver unit 1710 for realizing the sending function may be regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1710 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the transceiver unit may sometimes also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may sometimes be called a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit, etc.
  • the sending unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 1710 may correspond to the transceiver module 1620 , or in other words, the transceiver module 1620 may be implemented by the transceiver unit 1710 .
  • the transceiver unit 1710 is configured to perform a sending operation and a receiving operation of at least one of the source sending device, the receiving device or the target sending device in the embodiments shown in this application, and/or other processes for supporting the technologies described herein.
  • the processing unit 1720 may correspond to the processing module 1610 , or in other words, the processing module 1610 may be realized by the processing unit 1720 .
  • the processing unit 1720 is used to execute at least one of the source sending device, the receiving device, or the target sending device in the embodiment shown in this application, other than the transceiving operation. All operations performed by at least one of the sending device, receiving device, or target sending device except receiving and sending, and/or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the actions performed by the processing module 1610 in the above examples may be performed by the processing unit 1720 shown in FIG. 17 , and details are not repeated here.
  • the above actions performed by the transceiver module 1620 may be performed by the transceiver unit 1710 shown in FIG. 17 .
  • FIG. 17 For ease of illustration, only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 17 .
  • processors there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • a memory may also be called a storage medium or a storage device.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • B corresponding to A means that B is associated with A.
  • Determining B according to A does not mean determining B only according to A, but also determining B according to A and/or other information.
  • the corresponding relationships shown in the tables in this application can be configured or predefined.
  • the values of the information in each table are just examples, and may be configured as other values, which are not limited in this application.
  • the corresponding relationship shown in some rows may not be configured.
  • appropriate deformation adjustments can be made based on the above table, for example, splitting, merging, and so on.
  • the names of the parameters shown in the titles of the above tables may also adopt other names understandable by the communication device, and the values or representations of the parameters may also be other values or representations understandable by the communication device.
  • other data structures can also be used, for example, arrays, queues, containers, stacks, linear tables, pointers, linked lists, trees, graphs, structures, classes, heaps, hash tables or hash tables can be used wait.
  • Predefined in this application can be understood as defining, predefining, storing, prestoring, prenegotiating, preconfiguring, curing, or prefiring.
  • a processor may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • each step of the above-mentioned method embodiment can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other available Program logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or the processor may be any conventional processor, or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by a hardware decoding processor, or implemented by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, register.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a nonvolatile memory, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically programmable Erases programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory can be random access memory (RAM), which acts as external cache memory.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM direct memory bus random access memory
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the methods provided in the foregoing embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product may comprise one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer program instructions When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium (such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic disk), an optical medium (such as a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components can be combined or May be integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions described above are realized in the form of software function units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: various media capable of storing program codes such as U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory, random access memory, magnetic disk or optical disk.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

一种切换场景的数据转发方法及装置，用于提高执行网络编码功能传输的情况下，UE切换过程的传输可靠性。根据该方法，源发送设备可向接收设备发送经过网络编码处理的第一数据包，并根据来自于接收设备的第一信息，向该接收设备的目标发送设备转发第二数据包，第二数据包用于接收设备恢复第一数据包的原始数据。其中，第一信息可以指示接收设备根据第一数据包恢复的第二协议层的SDU中的第一SDU、待接收的冗余包的个数信息、准确接收或未正确接收的第一数据包的个数信息。本申请提供的方法和装置可以应用于扩展现实XR业务，或是其他对时延有要求的业务。

Description

一种切换场景的数据转发方法及装置
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请要求在2021年07月28日提交中华人民共和国知识产权局、申请号为202110857567.0、发明名称为“一种切换场景的数据转发方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请实施例涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种切换场景的数据转发方法及装置。
背景技术
在切换场景下，接收设备可能从一个发送设备(称为源发送设备)切换至另一个发送设备(称为目标发送设备)。在切换过程中，源发送设备可能会将切换前接收设备未成功接收到的数据转发至目标发送设备，从而在切换后目标发送设备会将这些数据发送至接收设备，避免接收设备丢失数据。
而现有技术中接收设备的切换并没有考虑源发送设备在向接收设备发送经过网络编码(network coding，NC)处理的数据的情况，因此亟需一种在切换场景中考虑发送设备的NC应用的方案。
发明内容
本身请提供一种切换场景的数据转发方法及装置，用以提供一种在切换场景中应用NC技术的方案，以期在发送设备采用网络编码技术向接收设备发送数据的情况下，提高接收设备切换过程的传输可靠性。
第一方面，提供一种数据发送方法。该方法可由源发送设备实施，源发送设备可以是发送设备或发送设备中的部件。源发送设备例如是基站。该源发送设备可用于向接收设备发送经过网络编码功能处理的数据。
基于该方法，可由源发送设备向接收设备发送第一数据包，其中，第一数据包包括原数据包和/或第一冗余包，或者，该第一数据包包括系统包和/或第一冗余包。第一冗余包可由原数据包执行网络编码功能的处理，该原数据包根据原始数据获得，该系统包根据该原数据包获得。该方法中的原始数据可以是待执行网络编码功能的处理的第一协议层的服务数据单元(service data unit，SDU)。源发送设备还可接收来自于该接收设备的第一信息，并根据第一信息向接收设备的目标发送设备发送第二数据包，该第二数据包用于接收设备恢复原始数据。该第一信息可用于指示以下中的至少一项：该接收设备根据该第一数据包恢复的第二协议层的SDU中的第一SDU，该第二协议层与该第一协议层为同一协议层或不同的协议层，该第二协议层的SDU对应于该第一协议层的SDU，比如，第二协议层的SDU为第一协议层的SDU，或第二协议层的SDU根据第一协议层的SDU经过第二协议层的处理获得；或者，待接收的冗余包的个数信息，该待接收的冗余包用于该接收设备恢复该原始数据；或者，该接收设备正确接收的该第一数据包的个数信息或未正确接收的该 第一数据包的个数信息。
采用以上方法，源发送设备可根据第一信息获知接收设备在切换前对于第一数据包的接收情况，据此可根据第一信息向目标发送设备发送第二数据包，用于接收设备恢复第一数据包对应的原始数据，使得接收设备在切换后仍然能够获得切换前的原始数据，避免丢包，因此可提高传输可靠性。
在一种可能的设计中，如果第一信息用于指示接收设备对该第一数据包成功译码，则源发送设备不需要向目标发送设备发送第二数据包。采用该设计，该第一信息可用于指示接收设备在切换前未发生丢包，则不需要源发送设备向目标发送设备转发数据，以节省发送设备间信令和处理开销。
在一种可能的设计中，目标发送设备为接收设备执行切换后与接收设备通信的设备，源发送设备为接收设备执行切换前与接收设备通信的设备。采用该设计，本申请提供的方法的应用场景为切换场景，可提高接收设备从源发送设备切换到目标发送设备的场景下接收设备的数据传输可靠性。或者，目标发送设备为与接收设备进行通信的辅站，所述源发送设备为与所述接收设备进行通信的主站，从而可提高双连接场景下的数据传输可靠性。
在一种可能的设计中，该第二数据包可包括原始数据对应的第二冗余包，第二冗余包可包括第一冗余包，和/或包括第一冗余包以外的冗余包。此时第二数据包的类型为冗余包类型。采用该设计，源发送设备可将原始数据对应的第二冗余包发送至目标发送设备，由目标发送设备根据第二冗余包向接收设备进行数据包的发送，接收设备能够根据接收到的数据包恢复出切换前未成功恢复的第一协议层的SDU。由于第二冗余包是经过网络编码处理的，目标发送设备不需要对第二冗余包执行网络编码处理，可降低目标发送设备的处理开销。
在一种可能的设计中，该源发送设备还可向该目标发送设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该第二数据包的类型为冗余包类型。采用该设计，目标发送设备可获知第二数据包的类型，如果第二数据包的类型是冗余包类型，则第二数据包已经是经过网络编码处理的数据包，目标发送设备不需要再对于第二数据包进行网络编码处理，以节省处理开销，且可以确保接收设备能够根据第二数据包恢复第一协议层的SDU。
在一种可能的设计中，如果该第二数据包承载于通用无线分组业务(general packet radio service，GPRS)隧道协议(GPRS tunnel protocol，GTP)隧道，则该第一指示信息携带在该GTP隧道的GTP头字段中。采用该设计，可通过GTP头字段携带第一指示信息，实现第一指示信息高效灵活的指示。或者，所述第二数据包承载于通用无线分组业务隧道协议GTP隧道；所述方法还包括：
所述源发送设备向所述目标发送设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示承载所述冗余包类型的第二数据包的所述GTP隧道的标识。
可选的，第一指示信息可以包括承载所述冗余包类型的第二数据包的所述GTP隧道的标识。进一步的，还可以包括指示冗余包类型的信息。其中，GTP隧道的标识例如是GTP终端端点标识(terminal end identifier，TEID)。例如，该第一指示信息可携带在Xn应用协议(Xn application protocol，Xn Ap)消息中。因此目标发送设备能根据第一指示信息确定对应的第二数据包是否需要进行网络编码处理，实现第一指示信息的高效灵活的指示。
在一种可能的设计中，该第二数据包还可包括第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU，该第二SDU不包括该第一SDU。此时第二数据包的类型为SDU类型。采用该设计，源发送 设备可将接收设备在切换前未成功恢复的第二协议层的SDU转发至目标发送设备，目标发送设备可将第二SDU发送至接收设备，而不需要对第二SDU进行网络编码处理，以节省处理开销。另外，该方案可避免接收设备在切换前后获得重复的第二协议层的SDU，避免接收设备重复递交数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，该源发送设备还可向该目标发送设备发送第二指示信息。其中，该第二指示信息用于指示该目标发送设备是否对该第二数据包执行网络编码功能的处理；和/或，该第二指示信息用于指示该第二数据包的类型为SDU类型。采用该设计，目标发送设备可根据第二指示信息确定不需要对第二数据包进行网络编码处理，能够降低目标发送设备的处理开销，且确保接收设备能够成功恢复第二SDU。该设计的一种可能的实现方式例如，源发送设备在Xn接口的GTP头字段中增加1比特(bit)信息，来指示通过GTP隧道转发的第二数据包是否需要目标发送设备进行网络编码功能处理，例如，该1比特信息的取值为0，表示目标发送设备需要对该第二数据包执行网络编码功能的处理。另一种可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息可指示目标发送设备需要执行网络编码处理的SDU所对应的序列号(sequence number，SN)，则目标发送设备可以不对SN小于该第二指示信息指示的SN的SDU执行网络编码功能的处理，或是，第二指示信息可指示目标发送设备不需要执行网络编码处理的SDU所对应的序列号(sequence number，SN)，这样，目标发送设备可以不对SN小于或等于该第二指示信息指示的SN的SDU执行网络编码功能的处理。或者，第二指示信息可以指示承载上述第二SDU的GTP隧道的标识。所述方法还包括：所述源发送设备向所述目标发送设备发送第二指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示承载所述SDU类型的第二数据包的所述GTP隧道的标识。可选的，第二指示信息可以包括承载所述第二SDU的所述GTP隧道的标识。进一步的，还可以包括指示SDU类型的信息。其中，GTP隧道的标识例如是GTP终端端点标识(terminal end identifier，TEID)。例如，该第二指示信息可携带在Xn应用协议(Xn application protocol，Xn Ap)消息中。因此目标发送设备能根据第二指示信息确定对应的第二SDU是否需要进行网络编码处理，实现第二指示信息的高效灵活的指示。
在一种可能的设计中，如果第二数据包包括第二冗余包或第二SDU，该源发送设备还可向目标发送设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该目标发送设备执行网络编码功能处理的第一个编码块的信息，或者，该第三指示信息用于指示该源发送设备执行网络编码功能处理的最后一个编码块的信息。采用该设计，目标发送设备可根据第三指示信息确定第二数据包对应的编码块的信息，避免第二冗余包或第二SDU的编码块的信息与目标发送设备后续执行网络编码处理获得的编码块的信息出现冲突，以确保接收设备成功译码来自于目标发送设备的编码块。
在一种可能的设计中，该第二数据包可包括该原始数据对应的一组该第二协议层的SDU。采用该设计，如果获得第一数据包的过程中，源发送设备可对原始数据对应的一组第二协议层的SDU执行网络编码处理，则源发送设备可将该一组第二协议层的SDU发送至目标发送设备，该一组第二协议层的SDU中可包括接收设备切换前未恢复出的第二协议层的SDU以及已经恢复出的第二协议层的SDU，使得接收设备可从目标发送设备获取对这一组SDU进行网络编码所获得的系统包和/或冗余包，用以恢复原始数据，以提高传输可靠性。
在一种可能的设计中，该源发送设备或目标发送设备还可向该接收设备发送第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该接收设备删除与该一组第二协议层的SDU中的全部或部分数据重复的数据，其中，该重复的数据包括以下中的至少一项：第二协议层的PDU、第二协议层的PDU对应的编码包，或者通过第二协议层的PDU对应的编码包成功恢复的第二协议层的SDU。其中，编码包可以包括冗余包，或，冗余包和系统包。采用该设计，由接收设备根据第四指示信息进行重复包删除，可避免接收设备重复递交相同的数据包，比如，向所述第二协议层的上一层递交。其中，源发送设备或目标发送设备可通过无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)消息向接收设备发送该第四指示信息。
该设计中，通过第四指示信息指示接收设备删除该重复的数据的方式例如：
第四指示信息包括编码块标识block ID(或者block ID列表，即多个block ID)，接收设备可删除以下中的至少一项：携带的block ID小于或等于该第四指示信息携带的block ID的编码包、通过这些编码包，即携带的block ID小于或等于该第四指示信息携带的block ID的编码包，成功恢复出来的PDCP SDU，或者这些编码包对应的PDCP PDU。其中，编码包可包括系统包和/或冗余包。或者，
第四指示信息包括PDCP SN(或者PDCP SN列表，即多个PDCP SN)，接收设备可根据该第四指示信息删除以下中的至少一项：SN对应的PDCP PDU、这些PDCP PDU，即，SN对应的PDCP PDU，对应的编码包，或者通过这些编码包成功恢复出来的PDCP SDU。其中，每个PDCP SN对应于一个PDCP PDU。或者，
第四指示信息包括起始PDCP SN信息和比特位图，起始PDCP SN对应于起始PDCP PDU。比特位图可用于指示位于该起始PDCP PDU之后的需要删除的PDCP PDU，则接收设备可根据比特位图，删除以下中的至少一项：该起始PDCP PDU之后的PDCP PDU、这些PDCP PDU对应的编码包，或者通过这些编码包成功恢复出来的PDCP SDU。或者，
第四指示信息可指示UE需要删除的第一个PDCP PDU和/或最后一个PDCP PDU，从而接收设备可删除以下中的至少一项：位于该第一个PDCP PDU和最后一个PDCP PDU之间的PDU、这些PDCP PDU对应的编码包，或者通过这些编码包成功恢复出来的PDCP SDU。
在一种可能的设计中，第一协议层和第二协议层为同一协议层，第一数据包所对应的第二协议层的SDU具有第一序号，第一序号用于标识第二协议层的SDU。该一组第二协议层的SDU中的每个SDU包括第一序号。或者，该一组第二协议层的SDU中的每个第二协议层的SDU具有对应的第一序号，该一组第二协议层的SDU承载于通用无线分组业务隧道协议GTP隧道，该第一序号携带在GTP隧道的GTP头字段中。该第一序号用于标识第二协议层的SDU。采用该设计，接收设备切换前和切换后获得的第二协议层的SDU包含该第一序号，因此接收设备能够根据第一序号识别切换前后获得的第二协议层的SDU是否存在重复，如果重复则可以删除重复的SDU，以避免接收设备重复递交相同的数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，该源发送设备还可接收来自于该目标发送设备的第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于指示该目标发送设备是否支持该网络编码功能的处理。采用该设计，源发送设备可获知目标发送设备是否支持网络编码。
在一种可能的设计中，该源发送设备还可向该目标发送设备发送该网络编码功能的配置信息，该配置信息包括以下中的至少一项：网络编码类型、编码块的大小、系统包的大小、原数据包的大小、系统包的个数、冗余包的个数、编码系数的选择，或卷积深度。采用该设计，源发送设备可向目标发送设备配置网络编码的配置信息，以便目标基站使用该 信息进行网络编码功能的处理。在目标发送设备采用与源发送设备相同的网络编码功能的配置信息，对第二数据包进行网络编码处理的情况下，则接收设备可采用相同的网络编码功能的解码信息对切换前和切换后的经过网络编码处理的数据包进行解码处理，提高解码效率。
在一种可能的设计中，该第一协议层包括服务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol，SDAP)、无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)或分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层，该第二协议层包括PDCP层。采用该设计，如果第一协议层包括SDAP层，且第二协议层为PDCP层，则源发送设备的网络编码功能是在SDAP层进行的。此时，PDCP层的SDU，即SDAP PDU，包括经过网络编码处理的数据包，则源发送设备可将接收设备切换前尚未成功恢复的第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU，由目标发送设备将根据第二SDU向接收设备发送数据包即可由接收设备恢复出第二SDU，该方案中不需要目标发送设备支持网络编码功能。另外，第一协议层包括PDCP层或RLC层，第二协议层PDCP层的情况下，则源发送设备的网络编码是在PDCP层进行的，源发送设备转发给目标发送设备的是未经过网络编码的PDCP SDU或第一协议层经过网络编码获得的冗余包，其中，未经过网络编码的PDCP SDU对应于待恢复的第一协议层的SDU，目标发送设备对该PDCP SDU进行网络编码或不进行网络编码处理后发送给接收设备，以便所述接收设备恢复该待恢复的第一协议层的SDU。这种情况下，是否对该PDCP SDU进行网络编码可以基于协议约定或指示给接收设备。
第二方面，提供一种切换场景的数据转发方法。该方法可由接收设备实施。接收设备例如是终端设备，或者，可用于终端设备的芯片。
基于该方法，接收设备可接收来自于源发送设备的第一数据包，并向源发送设备发送第一信息。接收设备还可接收来自于目标发送设备的第三数据包，第三数据包对应于源发送设备发送至目标发送设备的第二数据包，第一信息可用于该第二数据包的确定，第二数据包可用于接收设备恢复原始数据。
在一种可能的示例中，该目标发送设备为该接收设备执行切换后与该接收设备通信的设备，该源发送设备为该接收设备执行切换前与该接收设备通信的设备。
在一种可能的示例中，该第二数据包可包括以下中的至少一项：该原始数据对应的第二冗余包、该第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU，或者，该原始数据对应的一组该第二协议层的SDU。
在一种可能的示例中，如果第二数据包包括原始数据对应的第二冗余包，且第一协议层高于第二协议层，该第三数据包对应于该第二协议层的PDU，则该第二协议层的PDU可携带第五指示信息，用于指示该第二协议层的PDU是否经过网络编码功能的处理。采用该设计，在网络编码功能由高于第二协议层的第一协议层执行时，接收设备可根据第五指示信息获知第二协议层的PDU是否经过网络编码处理，从而决定是否对该第二协议层的PDU执行相应的译码处理，以正确接收第三数据包中的数据。对该第二协议层的PDU执行相应的译码处理，包括根据第二协议层的PDU获得第二协议层的SDU，并对第二协议层的SDU进行译码处理。可选的，第五指示信息可包括1比特信息，比如，该1比特信息的取值为0时，指示该第二协议层的PDU经过网络编码处理，当该1比特信息的取值为1时，指示该第二协议层的PDU未经过网络编码处理。举例来说，第五指示信息可携带在该PDU的头字段中。
在一种可能的示例中，如果第二数据包括该第二协议层的第二SDU，且对应于第二SDU的第三数据包包括该第二协议层的PDU，则接收设备还可接收来自于该源发送设备的第五指示信息，第五指示信息可用于指示该第二协议层的PDU是否经过网络编码处理。采用该设计，如果指示该第二协议层的PDU未经过网络编码处理，则接收设备不需要对该第二协议层的PDU执行网络编码处理相应的解码，以正确接收第三数据包中的数据。可选的，第五指示信息可包括第二协议层的PDU头字段中，和/或，第五指示信息可包括1比特信息。
在一种可能的示例中，接收设备可接收来自源发送设备或目标发送设备的第四指示信息，其中，该第四指示信息可用于指示接收设备删除与所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU中的全部或部分数据重复的数据，重复的数据包括以下中的至少一项：所述第二协议层的PDU、所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包，或者通过所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包成功恢复的所述第二协议层的SDU。
该设计中，通过第四指示信息指示接收设备删除该重复的数据的方式可以参考第一方面中相应的描述，在此不予赘述。
在一种可能的示例中，如果第二数据包括一组第二协议层的SDU，第二协议层和第一协议层为同一协议层，则第一数据包和第三数据包所对应的第二协议层的SDU均具有第一序号，第一序号用于标识第二协议层的SDU。该一组第二协议层的SDU中的每个SDU包括第一序号，或者，该一组第二协议层的SDU中的每个第二协议层的SDU具有对应的第一序号，该一组第二协议层的SDU承载于通用无线分组业务隧道协议GTP隧道，该第一序号携带在GTP隧道的GTP头字段中。
在一种可能的设计中，该第一协议层可包括SDAP层、RLC层或PDCP层，该第二协议层可包括PDCP层。
以上第二方面中所示方法及设计中的各个术语可参照第一方面中对于相应术语的说明。
以上第二方面中所示方法及设计中的有益效果可参见第一方面中响应有益效果的说明。
第三方面，提供一种数据发送方法。该方法可由目标发送设备实施，目标发送设备可以是发送设备或发送设备中的部件。目标发送设备例如是基站。
基于该方法，目标发送设备接收来自于源发送设备的第二数据包，并向接收设备发送第三数据包，其中，第三数据包是根据第二数据包获得的。例如，第三数据包就是第二数据包，或根据第二数据包进行处理获得的数据包。其中，第二数据包与第一信息有关，第二数据包用于恢复第一数据包对应的原始数据。
在一种可能的示例中，该目标发送设备为该接收设备执行切换后与该接收设备通信的设备，该源发送设备为该接收设备执行切换前与该接收设备通信的设备。
在一种可能的示例中，第二数据包包括原始数据对应的第二冗余包。
在一种可能的示例中，目标发送设备可接收来自于源发送设备的第一指示信息。
在一种可能的示例中，第二数据包可包括第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU。
在一种可能的示例中，目标发送设备还可接收来自于源发送设备的第二指示信息。
在一种可能的示例中，目标发送设备还可接收来自于源发送设备的第三指示信息。
在一种可能的示例中，第二数据包可包括原始数据对应的一组第二协议层的SDU。
在一种可能的示例中，目标发送设备还可向接收设备发送第四指示信息。可选的，该第四指示信息可以为该目标发送设备接收自源发送设备。
在一种可能的示例中，如果第二数据包括一组第二协议层的SDU，则第一数据包和第三数据包所对应的第二协议层的协议数据单元PDU均包括第一序号，第一序号用于标识所述第二协议层的所述SDU；该一组第二协议层的SDU中的每个第二协议层的SDU包括第一序号，第一序号用于标识所述第二协议层的SDU，或者，该一组第二协议层的SDU中的每个第二协议层的SDU具有对应的第一序号，第一序号用于标识第二协议层的SDU，一组所述第二协议层的SDU承载于GTP隧道，该第一序号可携带在该GTP隧道的GTP头字段中。
在一种可能的示例中，目标发送设备还可向源发送设备发送第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于指示目标发送设备是否支持所述网络编码功能的处理。
在一种可能的示例中，目标发送设备还可接收来自于源发送设备的网络编码功能的配置信息。
在一种可能的设计中，该第一协议层可包括SDAP层、RLC层或PDCP层，该第二协议层可包括PDCP层。
以上第三方面中所示方法及设计中的各个术语，比如第一指示信息，第二指示信息，第三指示信息，第四指示信息，网络编码功能的配置信息等可参照第一方面或第二方面中对于相应术语的说明。
以上第三方面中所示方法及设计中的有益效果可参见第一方面或第二方面中相应有益效果的说明。
第四方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，可以实现上述第一方面或其任一可能的设计中由源发送设备实现的方法。该装置包括用于执行上述方法的相应的单元或部件。该装置包括的单元可以通过软件和/或硬件方式实现。该装置例如可以为源发送设备、或者为可支持源发送设备中实现上述方法的芯片、芯片系统、车载通信模组、或处理器等。
示例性的，该通信装置可包括收发单元(或称通信模块、收发模块)和处理单元(或称处理模块)等等模块化组件，这些模块可以执行上述第一方面或其任一可能的设计中源发送设备的相应功能。当通信装置是源发送设备时，收发单元在执行发送步骤时可以是发送单元，收发单元在执行接收步骤时可以是接收单元，而收发单元可以由收发器代替，发送单元可以由发送器代替，接收单元可以由接收器代替。收发单元可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理单元可以是处理器，例如基带芯片等。当通信装置是具有上述源发送设备功能的部件时，收发单元可以是射频单元，处理单元可以是处理器。当通信装置是芯片系统时，收发单元可以是芯片系统的输入输出接口、处理单元可以是芯片系统的处理器，例如：中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)。
收发单元可用于执行第一方面或其任一可能的设计中由源发送设备执行的接收和/或发送的动作。例如，可用于执行第一方面所示的由源发送设备执行的第一数据包、第二数据包、第一指示信息至第四指示信息和网络编码功能的配置信息的发送，以及用于第一方面所示第一信息和第六指示信息的接收。
处理单元可用于执行第一方面或其任一可能的设计中由源发送设备执行的接收和发送以外的动作。例如，处理单元可用于生成源发送设备在第一方面所示方法中发送的数据包和信息，或用于对源发送设备在第一方面所示方法中接收的信息进行处理。
可选的，该通信装置可包括收发模块和/或通信模块。
可选的，该通信装置可包括处理器和/或收发器。该通信装置还可包括存储器。
可选的，该通信装置可由电路实现。
第五方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，可以实现上述第二方面或其任一可能的设计中由接收设备实现的方法。该装置包括用于执行上述方法的相应的单元或部件。该装置包括的单元可以通过软件和/或硬件方式实现。该装置例如可以为接收设备、或者为可支持接收设备中实现上述方法的芯片、芯片系统或处理器等。
示例性的，该通信装置可包括收发单元(或称通信模块、收发模块)和处理单元(或称处理模块)等等模块化组件，这些模块可以执行上述第二方面或其任一可能的设计中接收设备的相应功能。当通信装置是接收设备时，收发单元在执行发送步骤时可以是发送单元，收发单元在执行接收步骤时可以是接收单元，而收发单元可以由收发器代替，发送单元可以由发送器代替，接收单元可以由接收器代替。收发单元可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理单元可以是处理器，例如基带芯片等。当通信装置是具有上述接收设备功能的部件时，收发单元可以是射频单元，处理单元可以是处理器。当通信装置是芯片系统时，收发单元可以是芯片系统的输入输出接口、处理单元可以是芯片系统的处理器，例如：CPU。
收发单元可用于执行第二方面或其任一可能的设计中由接收设备执行的接收和/或发送的动作。例如，可用于执行第二方面所示的由接收设备执行的对于第一数据包、第三数据包、第四指示信息、第五指示信息的接收的地址，或执行对于第一信息的发送。
处理单元可用于执行第二方面或其任一可能的设计中由接收设备执行的接收和发送以外的动作。例如，处理单元可用于生成由接收设备在第二方面所示方法中发送的信息，或用于对接收设备在第二方面所示方法中接收的数据包和信息进行处理。
可选的，该通信装置可包括收发模块和/或通信模块。
可选的，该通信装置可包括处理器和/或收发器。该通信装置还可包括存储器。
可选的，该通信装置可由电路实现。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，可以实现上述第三方面或其任一可能的设计中由目标发送设备实现的方法。该装置包括用于执行上述方法的相应的单元或部件。该装置包括的单元可以通过软件和/或硬件方式实现。该装置例如可以为目标发送设备、或者为可支持目标发送设备中实现上述方法的芯片、芯片系统或处理器等。
示例性的，该通信装置可包括收发单元(或称通信模块、收发模块)和处理单元(或称处理模块)等等模块化组件，这些模块可以执行上述第三方面或其任一可能的设计中目标发送设备的相应功能。当通信装置是目标发送设备时，收发单元在执行发送步骤时可以是发送单元，收发单元在执行接收步骤时可以是接收单元，而收发单元可以由收发器代替，发送单元可以由发送器代替，接收单元可以由接收器代替。收发单元可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理单元可以是处理器，例如基带芯片等。当通信装置是具有上述目标发送设备功能的部件时，收发单元可以是射频单元，处理单元可以是处理器。当通信装置是芯片系统时，收发单元可以是芯片系统的输入输出接口、处理单元可以是芯片系统的处理器，例如：CPU。
收发单元可用于执行第三方面或其任一可能的设计中由目标发送设备执行的接收和/或发送的动作。例如，可用于执行第三方面所示的由目标发送设备执行的对于第二数据包、第一指示信息至第四指示信息和网络编码功能的配置信息的接收，以及用于第三方面所示 第三数据包和第六指示信息发送。处理单元可用于执行第三方面或其任一可能的设计中由目标发送设备执行的接收和发送以外的动作。例如，处理单元可用于生成由接收设备在第三方面所示方法中发送的数据包和信息，或用于对接收设备在第三方面所示方法中接收的数据包和信息进行处理。
可选的，该通信装置可包括收发模块和/或通信模块。
可选的，该通信装置可包括处理器和/或收发器。该通信装置还可包括存储器。
可选的，该通信装置可由电路实现。
第七方面，提供一种通信系统，该通信系统包括第四方面至第六方面所示的通信装置。
第八方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机指令或程序，当该计算机指令或程序在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行上述第一方面至第三方面或其任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第九方面，提供一种计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行上述第一方面至第三方面或其任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。
第十方面，提供一种电路，该电路与存储器耦合，该电路被用于执行上述第一方面至第三方面或其任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。该电路可包括芯片电路、芯片或芯片系统等。
以上第二方面至第十方面及其可能的设计的有益效果可参照第一方面及其可能的设计中的有益效果。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的架构示意图；
图2(a)为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图；
图2(b)为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图；
图2(c)为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图；
图2(d)为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图；
图4(a)为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构示意图；
图4(b)为本申请实施例提供的一种协议栈的架构示意图；
图4(c)为本申请实施例提供的另一种协议栈的架构示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种切换过程示意图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的另一种切换过程示意图；
图7(a)为本申请实施例提供的一种网络编码过程示意图；
图7(b)为本申请实施例提供的另一种网络编码过程示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的另一种网络编码过程示意图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种切换场景的数据转发方法的流程示意图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的另一种切换过程示意图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的另一种切换过程示意图；
图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种切换过程示意图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的另一种切换过程示意图；
图14为本申请实施例提供的另一种切换过程示意图；
图15为本申请实施例提供的另一种切换过程示意图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图17为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。
为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案，在本申请的实施例中，采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。例如，第一信息和第二信息仅仅是为了区分不同的信息，并不对其先后顺序进行限定。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定，并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。
本申请实施例中，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a，b，或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a，b，c；a和b；a和c；b和c；或a和b和c。其中a，b，c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
为便于理解本申请实施例提供的数据传输方法，下面将对本申请实施例提供的数据传输方法的系统架构和应用场景进行说明。可理解的，本申请实施例描述的系统架构和应用场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案，并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定。
图1是本申请的实施例应用的通信系统1000的架构示意图。如图1所示，该通信系统包括无线接入网100和核心网130，可选的，通信系统1000还可以包括互联网140。其中，无线接入网100可以包括至少一个无线接入网设备(如图1中的110a和110b)，还可以包括至少一个终端(如图1中的120a-120j)。终端通过无线的方式与无线接入网设备相连，无线接入网设备通过无线或有线方式与核心网连接。核心网设备与无线接入网设备可以是独立的不同的物理设备，也可以是将核心网设备的功能与无线接入网设备的逻辑功能集成在同一个物理设备上，还可以是一个物理设备上集成了部分核心网设备的功能和部分的无线接入网设备的功能。终端和终端之间以及无线接入网设备和无线接入网设备之间可以通过有线或无线的方式相互连接。图1只是示意图，该通信系统中还可以包括其它网络设备，如还可以包括无线中继设备和无线回传设备，在图1中未画出。
无线接入网设备可以是具有无线收发功能的设备。该无线接入网设备可以是提供无线通信功能服务的设备，通常位于网络侧，包括但不限于：第五代(5th generation，5G)通信系统中的下一代基站(gNodeB，gNB)，第六代(6th generation，6G)移动通信系统中的下一代基站，未来移动通信系统中的基站或WiFi系统中的接入节点，无线访问点，LTE系统中的演进型节点B(evolved node B，eNB)，无线网络控制器(radio network controller，RNC)，节点B(node B，NB)，基站控制器(base station controller，BSC)，家庭基站(例如，home evolved NodeB，或home Node B，HNB)，基带单元(base band unit，BBU)，传输接收点(transmission reception point，TRP)，发射点(transmitting point，TP)，基站收发 台(base transceiver station，BTS)等。
在一种网络结构中，该接入网设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit，CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit，DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备、或者控制面CU节点和用户面CU节点，以及DU节点的RAN设备。接入网设备为小区提供服务，用户设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如，频域资源，或者说，频谱资源)与基站进行通信，该小区可以是基站(例如基站)对应的小区，小区可以属于宏基站，也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站，这里的小小区可以包括：城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等，这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点，适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。无线接入网设备可以是宏基站(如图1中的110a)，也可以是微基站或室内站(如图1中的110b)，还可以是中继节点或施主节点，V2X通信系统中的为用户设备提供无线通信服务的设备、云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器、中继站、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来演进网络中的网络设备等。本申请的实施例对无线接入网设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。为了便于描述，下文以基站作为无线接入网设备的例子进行描述。
终端还可以称为终端设备、用户设备(user equipment，UE)、移动台(mobile station，MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)等，其可以是用户侧的一种用于接收或发射信号的实体，如手机。终端设备可以是用户设备(user equipment，UE)，其中，UE包括具有无线通信功能的手持式设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备或计算设备。示例性地，UE可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑或带无线收发功能的电脑。终端设备还可以是虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、工业控制中的无线终端、无人驾驶中的无线终端、远程医疗中的无线终端、智能电网中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。终端可以广泛应用于各种场景，例如，设备到设备(device-to-device，D2D)、车物(vehicle to everything，V2X)通信、机器类通信(machine-type communication，MTC)、物联网(internet of things，IOT)、虚拟现实、增强现实、工业控制、自动驾驶、远程医疗、智能电网、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市等。终端可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、可穿戴设备、车辆、无人机、直升机、飞机、轮船、机器人、机械臂、智能家居设备等。本申请实施例中，用于实现终端的功能的装置可以是终端；也可以是能够支持终端实现该功能的装置，例如芯片系统、或通信模块、或调制解调器等，该装置可以被安装在终端中。本申请实施例中，芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现终端的功能的装置是终端，以终端是UE为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。本申请的实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。
可选的，UE也可以用于充当基站。例如，UE可以充当调度实体，其在车辆外联(vehicle-to-everything，V2X)、设备到设备(device-to-device，D2D)或点对点(peer to peer，P2P)等中的UE之间提供侧行链路信号。
基站和终端可以是固定位置的，也可以是可移动的。基站和终端可以部署在陆地上，包括室内或室外、手持或车载；也可以部署在水面上；还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和人造卫星上。本申请的实施例对基站和终端的应用场景不做限定。
基站和终端的角色可以是相对的，例如，图1中的直升机或无人机120i可以被配置成移动基站，对于那些通过120i接入到无线接入网100的终端120j来说，120i是基站；但对于基站110a来说，120i是终端，即110a与120i之间是通过无线空口协议进行通信的。当然，110a与120i之间也可以是通过基站与基站之间的接口协议进行通信的，此时，相对于110a来说，120i也是基站。因此，基站和终端都可以统一称为通信装置，图1中的110a、110b以及120a-120j可以称为具有它们各自相对应的功能的通信装置，例如具有基站功能的通信装置、或者具有终端功能的通信装置。
基站和终端之间、基站和基站之间、终端和终端之间可以通过授权频谱进行通信，也可以通过免授权频谱进行通信，也可以同时通过授权频谱和免授权频谱进行通信；可以通过6千兆赫(gigahertz，GHz)以下的频谱进行通信，也可以通过6GHz以上的频谱进行通信，还可以同时使用6GHz以下的频谱和6GHz以上的频谱进行通信。本申请的实施例对无线通信所使用的频谱资源不做限定。
在本申请的实施例中，基站的功能也可以由基站中的模块(如芯片)来执行，也可以由包含有基站功能的控制子系统来执行。这里的包含有基站功能的控制子系统可以是智能电网、工业控制、智能交通、智慧城市等上述终端的应用场景中的控制中心。终端的功能也可以由终端中的模块(如芯片或调制解调器)来执行，也可以由包含有终端功能的装置来执行。
进一步的，本申请可以应用于多种具体通信场景，例如，基站和终端之间或终端之间的点对点传输(如图2(a)为基站和终端之间的点对点传输)、基站和终端的多跳(如图2(b)、图2(c))传输、多个基站和终端的双连接(dual connectivity，DC)(如图2(d))或多连接等场景。需要说明的是，如上具体通信应用场景只是举例，并不产生限制。特别地，从业务的角度看，本申请实施例适用于诸多业务场景，例如扩展现实(extended reality，XR)业务中的数据编码场景、上行大容量场景等。此外，图2(a)至图2(d)不对适用于本申请的网络架构产生限制，并且本申请不限制上行、下行、接入链路、回传(backhaul)链路、侧链路(sidelink)等传输。
参见图3，图3是本申请实施例提供的通信系统的简化示意图。为了简单起见，图3仅示出了基站110、UE 120以及网络130。基站110包括接口111和处理器112。处理器112可选地可以存储程序114。基站110可选地可以包括存储器113。存储器113可选地可以存储程序115。UE 120包括接口121和处理器122。处理器122可选地可以存储程序124。UE 120可选地可以包括存储器123。存储器123可选地可以存储程序125。这些组件一起工作，以提供本申请中描述的各种功能。例如，处理器112和接口121一起工作以提供基站110与UE 120之间的无线连接。处理器122和接口121共同作用，实现UE 120的下行传输和/或上行传输。
网络130可以包括一个或多个网络节点130a、130b，以提供核心网功能。网络节点130a、130b可以是5G核心网节点，或更早一代(例如4G、3G或2G)核心网节点。例如，网络130a、130b可以是接入管理功能(AMF)、移动性管理实体(MME)等。网络130还可以包括公共交换电话网络(PSTN)、分组数据网络、光网络、互联网协议(IP)网络中的一个或多个网络节点。广域网(WAN)、局域网(LAN)、无线局域网(WLAN)、有线网络、无线网络、城域网和其他网络，以使UE 120和/或基站110之间能够进行通信。
处理器(例如，处理器112和/或处理器122)可包括一个或多个处理器并实现为计算 设备的组合。处理器(例如，处理器112和/或处理器122)可分别包括以下一种或多种：微处理器、微控制器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、数字信号处理设备(DSPD)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)、可编程逻辑器件(PLD)、选通逻辑、晶体管逻辑、分立硬件电路、处理电路或其它合适的硬件、固件和/或硬件和软件的组合，用于执行本申请中所描述的各种功能。处理器(例如，处理器112和/或处理器122)可以是通用处理器或专用处理器。例如，处理器112和/或处理器122可以是基带处理器或中央处理器。基带处理器可用于处理通信协议和通信数据。中央处理器可用于使基站110和/或UE 120执行软件程序，并处理软件程序中的数据。
接口(例如，接口111和/或121)可包括用于实现与一个或多个计算机设备(例如，UE、BS和/或网络节点)之间的通信。在一些实施例中，接口可以包括用于耦合有线连接的电线、或用于耦合无线收发器的管脚、或用于无线连接的芯片和/或管脚。在一些实施例中，接口可以包括发射器、接收器、收发器和/或天线。接口可以被配置为使用任何可用的协议(例如3GPP标准)。
本申请中的程序在广义上用于表示软件。软件的非限制性示例是程序代码、程序、子程序、指令、指令集、代码、代码段、软件模块、应用程序、软件应用程序等。程序可以在处理器和/或计算机中运行，以使基站110和/或UE 120执行本申请中描述的各种功能和/或过程。
内存(例如存储器113和/或存储器123)可存储由处理器112、122在执行软件时操纵的数据。存储器113、123可以使用任何存储技术实现。例如，存储器可以是处理器和/或计算机能够访问的任何可用存储介质。存储介质的非限制性示例包括：RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM、可移动介质、光盘存储器、磁盘存储介质、磁存储设备、闪存、寄存器、状态存储器、远程挂载存储器、本地或远程存储器组件，或能够携带或存储软件、数据或信息并可由处理器/计算机访问的任何其它介质。
内存(例如存储器113和/或存储器123)和处理器(例如处理器112和/或处理器122)可以分开设置或集成在一起。存储器可以用于与处理器连接，使得处理器能够从存储器中读取信息，在存储器中存储和/或写入信息。存储器113可以集成在处理器112中。存储器123可以集成在处理器122中。处理器(例如处理器113和/或处理器123)和存储器(例如处理器112和/或处理器122)可以设置在集成电路中(例如，该集成电路可以设置在UE或基站或其他网络节点中)。
如图4(a)所示，以gNB为例，在基站采用CU-DU分离架构时，本申请所示方法的一种可能的应用场景包括：gNB由1个gNB-CU以及1个或者多个gNB-DU组成，其中，一个gNB-DU仅能连接到一个gNB-CU，且gNB-CU与gNB-DU之间通过F1接口相连，gNB-CU与5G核心网(5G core，5GC)之间通过NG接口相连。gNB与gNB(或gNB-CU)之间可通过Xn(或Xn-C)接口连接。
UE可通过gNB-DU接入gNB-CU，可选的，与UE对等的物理层(physical layer，PHY)、介质接入控制(medium access control，MAC)和无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层功能位于gNB-DU上，与UE对等的PDCP、服务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol，SDAP)和RRC层功能位于gNB-CU上，如图4(b)和图4(c)所示。
对控制面而言，如图4(b)所示，上行(uplink，UL)方向上，gNB-DU将UE生成的RRC消息封装在F1接口的F1应用协议(F1application protocol，F1AP)消息中发送到 gNB-CU。下行(downlink，DL)方向上，gNB-CU将RRC消息封装在F1AP消息中发送到gNB-DU，gNB-DU从F1AP消息中提取出RRC消息映射到无线(Uu)接口对应的SRB(SRB0/SRB1/SRB2)上发送给UE。如图4(b)所示，控制面还可能涉及gNB-DU与gNB-CU在流控制传输协议(stream control transmission protocol，SCTP)、IP、层2(layer 2，L2)或层1(layer 1，L1)等协议层的处理，以及，涉及UE与gNB-DU在RLC、MAC和PHY等协议层的处理，以及涉及UE与gNB-CU在RRC和PDCP等协议层的处理。
对用户面而言，如图4(c)所示，UL方向上，gNB-DU将从Uu接口DRB上收到的UE数据包映射到对应的通用无线分组业务(general packet radio service，GPRS)隧道协议(GPRS tunnel protocol，GTP)隧道的用户面(GTP-U)中发送到gNB-CU。DL方向上，gNB-CU将UE数据包映射到对应的GTP隧道中发送到gNB-DU，gNB-DU从GTP隧道中提取出UE数据包，并将该UE数据包映射到Uu接口对应的DRB上发送给UE。如图4(b)所示，用户面还可能涉及gNB-DU与gNB-CU在用户数据报协议(user datagram protocol，UDP)、IP、L2或L1等协议层的处理，以及，涉及UE与gNB-DU在RLC、MAC和PHY等协议层的处理，以及涉及UE与gNB-CU在SDAP和PDCP等协议层的处理。
在现有机制中，UE可能进行切换。这里的切换例如，UE从源基站切换到目标基站，源基站例如源gNB(source gNB，S-gNB)，目标基站例如目标gNB(target gNB，T-gNB)。其中，针对使用不同RLC传输模式的业务在切换过程中的处理不同。其中，RLC传输模式包括非确认模式(UM)和确认模式(AM)。其中，在AM模式下，为了保证业务传输的可靠性，需要执行自动重传请求(automatic repeat-request，ARQ)处理，即UE需要在RLC层反馈RLC状态报告，以便源基站触发ARQ重传。在UM模式下，不要求保证业务传输的可靠性，则不需要执行ARQ处理，即接收端不需要反馈RLC状态报告。在基站采用CU-DU分离架构时，gNB-DU收到UE反馈的RLC状态报告后，gNB-DU可以获知UE对PDCP协议数据单元(protocol data unit，PDU)的接收情况，并向gNB-CU发送下行数据传输状态(downlink data delivery status，DDDS)消息，DDDS消息中可携带UE对PDCP PDU的接收情况信息，以便将UE对PDCP PDU的接收情况进一步通知gNB-CU。
应理解，本申请中，采用CU-DU分离式架构的情况下，源基站的CU可表示为S-gNB-CU，源基站的DU可表示为S-gNB-DU。同理，目标基站的CU可表示为T-gNB-CU，目标基站的DU可表示为T-gNB-DU。
这里以下行数据处理为例，对在发生切换时源基站、目标基站和UE分别的处理方式进行说明。
(一)UM模式
(1)源基站向目标基站转发PDCP SDU，该PDCP SDU不包括源基站的PDCP层已经处理并发送到RLC层的SDU。也就是说，只要源基站将PDCP SDU对应的PDCP PDU传输到RLC层，不管UE是否接收到该PDCP SDU，源基站都不会将该PDCP SDU在Xn接口转发至目标基站。
(2)目标基站将TX_NEXT置为0，即对通过Xn接口收到的转发PDCP SDU从PDCP SN＝0开始编号并处理，生成PDCP PDU并向UE发送。
(3)UE将RX_NEXT置为0，即从SN＝0重新开始接收PDCP PDU。
如图5所示，S-gNB(源gNB)的PDCP层从上层收到PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2、PDCP SDU3和PDCP SDU4，其中，PDCP SDU1和PDCP SDU2已经经过PDCP层处理生 成PDCP PDU1和PDCP PDU2并递交到RLC层，则在UE切换过程中，S-gNB-CU只将PDCP SDU3和PDCP SDU4通过Xn-C接口转发至T-gNB-CU，而不再将PDCP SDU1和PDCP SDU2转发至T-gNB-CU。本申请中，PDCP层处理指的是关联PDCP SN、头压缩、加密/完整性保护处理或者添加PDCP头等处理中的至少一项。在T-gNB(目标gNB)侧，从SN＝0开始对来自S-gNB的PDCP SDU进行处理，将PDCP SDU进行PDCP层处理后生成PDCP PDU并将生成的PDCP PDU发送至UE。例如：T-gNB对PDCP SDU3使用SN＝0生成PDCP PDU3后向UE发送，以及，T-gNB对SDU4使用SN＝1生成PDCP PDU4后向UE发送。UE从SN＝0开始接收来自于T-gNB的对应PDCP PDU。
(二)AM模式
(1)源基站向目标基站转发PDCP SDU，该PDCP SDU不包括UE已经成功接收的SDU。也就是说，源基站的RLC层根据UE的ARQ反馈，可以确定RLC SDU(等价于PDCP PDU)在UE侧的接收情况。源基站将尚未收到RLC ACK反馈的RLC SDU对应的PDCP SDU在Xn接口上转发给目标基站，因为该PDCP SDU在源基站已经被处理，并被关联了一个PDCP SN，为了保证业务的连续性，源基站向目标基站转发该PDCP SDU时，还需要转发该SDU关联的SN，以便目标基站对该PDCP SDU继续使用原来关联的SN进行处理后生成PDCP PDU发送给UE。例如，源基站通过GTP隧道向目标基站转发该PDCP SDU，并在GTP隧道头字段中携带该PDCP SDU关联的SN。此外，源基站还将尚未经过PDCP层处理的PDCP SDU在Xn接口上转发给目标基站，目标基站使用SN状态迁移消息中携带的DL COUNT值对该PDCP SDU进行处理生成PDCP PDU发送给UE。(3)UE按照SN的大小按序处理收到的PDCP PDU。
如图6所示，源基站收到PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2、PDCP SDU3和PDCP SDU4，其中，PDCP SDU1和PDCP SDU2经过PDCP层处理后生成PDCP PDU1(对应PDCP SN＝0)和PDCP PDU2(对应PDCP SN＝1)发送给UE。根据UE的RLC状态报告的反馈，源基站能够获知UE尚未正确接收SDU2，因此，UE切换过程中，源基站将PDCP SDU2、PDCP SDU3和PDCP SDU4在Xn接口上转发给目标基站，并在转发SDU2时携带PDCP SN＝1的信息，此外，源基站还向目标基站发送SN状态迁移消息，该消息中携带的DL COUNT值包含PDCP SN＝2的信息。目标基站对收到的SDU2使用SN＝1进行处理生成PDCP PDU2后发送给UE，对收到的PDCP SDU3使用SN＝2进行处理生成PDU3后发送给UE，对收到的PDCP SDU4使用SN＝3进行处理生成PDU4后发送给UE。
上述内容简要阐述了本申请实施例的系统架构和可能的应用场景，为更好地理解本申请实施例的技术方案，下面将简要介绍网络编码。
本申请中的网络编码功能包括对原数据包进行网络编码和添加编码包包头。其中，网络编码可以通过编码器来实现，编码器的输入为K个原数据包，编码器的输出为N个编码数据包(简称为编码包)，其中，N和K均为正整数，且N大于K。编码包包括N-K(N减K)个冗余包和K个系统包，或者，N个冗余包(即编码包均为冗余包，不包括系统包)。其中，系统包的包体的内容和原数据包的内容一致(也就是说，系统包由编码包包头和原数据包构成)，也即，系统包的编码系数为单位向量。可选的，系统包可以通过对原数据包直接加包头来获得。冗余包的编码系数为非单位向量。通过冗余包的内容和生成该冗余包的原数据包的内容之间的关联，接收设备可以通过冗余包和成功接收的原数据包或系统包一起译码，恢复未成功接收的原数据包。基于网络编码的特点，原数据包的包大小相等。 进一步的，网络编码功能还可以包括对原始数据进行处理获得大小相等的原数据包的过程，该处理可以包括分割，级联，或，加填充(padding)中的一种或多种。发送设备的网络编码功能对应接收设备的网络译码功能。接收设备通过对成功接收的至少K个编码包一起进行译码可以恢复出K个原数据包。具有网络编码功能或网络编码对应的译码功能的协议层称为网络编/译码层，本申请中将网络编/译码层简称为网络编码层，即，上述具有网络编码的协议层称为网络编码层。本申请中，原始数据可以是某协议层的SDU。
网络编码层可以是无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)层，SDAP，PDCP层，回传适配协议(backhaul adaptation protocol，BAP)层，无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层，媒体接入控制(medium access control，MAC)层，或PHY等协议层。网络编码层也可以是除PHY层，MAC层，RLC层，BAP层，PDCP层、SDAP层以及RRC层之外的一个新的协议层，可以为在PDCP层之上增加网络编码层(例如：5G NR中，在PDCP层和SDAP层之间增加网络编码层)，或者，在BAP层之上增加网络编码层，或者，在PDCP层和RLC层之间增加网络编码层，或者，在RLC层和MAC层之间增加网络编码层，或者，在MAC层和PHY层之间增加网络编码层。
常用的网络编码方案包括分组码和卷积码两大类，其中，分组码的方案包括随机线性网络编码(random linear network coding，RLNC)、确定线性网络编码(deterministic linear network coding，DLNC)、分批稀疏码(batch sparse code，BATS code)、纠删码(erasure code)、喷泉码(fountain code)、最大距离可分码(maximum distance separable code，MDS code)、卢比变换码(luby transform，LT)码、快速旋风(rapid tornado)码、RaptorQ码、无速率(rateless)码和里德-所罗门(Reed-Solomon，RS)码等中的一项或多项，卷积码的方案包括卷积网络编码(convolutional network coding，CNC)、流编码(streaming code)和滑动窗口网络编码(sliding window network coding)等中的一项或多项。
下面对发送设备(简称为发端)网络编码功能的两种可能的网络编码流程进行介绍。
第一种可能的网络编码流程：
先获取原始数据，其中，原始数据可以是执行网络编码的协议层的SDU，也即，执行网络编码的协议层所接收到的PDU。以原始数据是PDU为例进行描述，发送设备可通过对一个或多个PDU进行分割，级联，或，加padding等处理中的一项或多项获得等大小的原数据包。其中，原数据包携带每个原数据包和该原数据包对应的一个或多个PDU之间的对应关系。该携带可以是显式的携带，比如，携带每个原数据包和该原数据包对应的一个或多个PDU之间的位置映射关系，该携带也可以是隐式的携带，比如，每个原数据包和该原数据包对应的一个或多个PDU之间的对应关系是默认的。这样接收设备(简称为收端)可以基于所述对应关系从原数据包恢复出PDU。
可选的，每个原数据包的包头携带该原数据包和该原数据包对应的一个或多个PDU之间的对应关系。这种情况下，一种可能的实现是：先对PDU进行前述的分割，级联，或加padding等处理中的一项或多项获得原数据，再对原数据添加包头获得等大小的原数据包。
可选的，所述对应关系可以通过所述一个或多个PDU的分割和/或级联的情况进行指示。
可以理解的是，若原始数据本身就是等大小的话，那么就可以跳过上述通过对一个或多个PDU或者SDU进行分割，级联或加padding等处理中的一项或多项获得等大小的原 数据包这个步骤，即，PDU或者SDU就是等大小的原数据包。
图7(a)和图7(b)以作为原始数据的PDU大小不等以及通过包头(表示为Header)携带上述对应关系为例，先对PDU1～PDU4进行处理得到原数据Data1～Data4，这里对PDU的处理可以是分割，级联或加padding等操作中的一项或多项。原数据的大小可以相等也可以不等。再对该组原数据进行加包头的操作，得到K个原数据包，即图7(a)和图7(b)中的Pkt1～Pkt4，原数据包可以理解为是未经过编码的数据包，且原数据包的大小相等。
再对多个等大小的原数据包进行编码。
具体的，对多个等大小的原数据包进行编码可以采取三种方式中的任意一种。
方式1如图7(a)所示，通过对一组K个原数据包进行编码，并添加编码包包头(表示为NC_Header)，可以得到N-K个编码包，这里的编码包可以称为冗余包或者校验包，即图7(a)所示的EPkt1～EPkt2。其中，K为正整数，N为不小于K的正整数。
通过上述操作，发端最终发送K个原数据包和N-K个冗余包。
方式2和方式3如图7(b)所示，通过对K个原数据包进行处理得到N个编码包，如图中EPkt1～EPkt6，编码包可以分为系统包和冗余包，系统包也可以称为系统数据包。其中，编码包包头可以包括系数因子字段，该系数因子字段指示获得该编码包的编码系数。系统包(EPkt1～EPkt4)由编码包包头以及包体构成，包体的内容和原数据包的内容一致，包头包括的系数因子字段为单位向量。因此，对原数据包进行处理获得系统包的过程可以包括方式2和方式3两种，其中，K为正整数，N为不小于K的正整数。
其中方式2中，由原数据包直接添加编码包包头生成系统包，即不经过编码处理。
其中方式3中，原数据包经过编码处理，即经过为单位向量的系数因子编码后，并添加编码包包头生成系统包。
方式2和方式3中的冗余包的生成方式相同，均为对原数据包编码且添加编码包包头而生成。如图7(b)中所示，N-K个冗余包(如EPkt5～EPkt6)由K个原数据包(如Pkt1～Pkt4)通过编码并添加编码包包头生成，其包体部分(EData1～EData1)是K个原数据包和系数因子相乘再相加作用的结果，其中系数因子为非单位向量。
通过上述操作，发端最终发送N个编码包。
相应的，仍以图7(a)为例，对于收端，针对方式1，收端收到至少K个数据包，且该K个数据包线性无关，即对应的系数矩阵的秩等于K，这样，收端通过译码可以恢复出K个原数据包，继而恢复出相应的PDU。其中，该至少K个数据包可以全部为冗余包，或，部分为原数据包及部分为冗余包，在此不予限定。可以理解的是，如果收端收到的是K个原数据包，那么可以不进行译码。
针对方式2和方式3，仍以图7(b)为例，收端收到至少K个数据包，且该K个数据包线性无关，即对应的系数矩阵的秩等于K，这样，收端通过译码可以恢复出K个原数据包，继而恢复出相应的PDU。该至少K个数据包可以全部为冗余包，或，部分为系统包及部分为冗余包，在此不予限定。可以理解的是，如果收端收到的是K个系统包，那么可以不进行译码，进行去编码包包头处理即可。
在上述的网络编码功能中，通过对一个或多个原始数据进行分割，级联，或加padding等处理中的一项或多项获得等大小的原数据包，其中，原数据包携带每个原数据包和该原数据包对应的一个或多个原始数据之间的对应关系。
第二种可能的网络编码流程：
在第二种可能的网络编码流程中，可以采用虚拟分割，级联或加padding的处理中的一项或多项的方式获得等大小的原数据包。在这种方式中，先将原始数据和每个原始数据的头信息映射到缓存中，该缓存可以是真实缓存也可以是虚拟缓存，每个原始数据的头信息指示每个原始数据映射在缓存中的位置。再从缓存中获得多个等大小的原数据包。进而对多个等大小的原数据包进行编码获得编码包。其中，从缓存中获得多个等大小的原数据包的方式可以是预先设定的，或者，由发端指示给收端，或者，由数据传输的双方中处于控制地位的一方确定后指示给另一方。这种方式中，原数据包没有包头，但考虑和第一种方式中的描述对齐，仍将本方案中从缓存中获得的等大小的数据段称为原数据包。可以理解的是，本方案中的原数据包也可以称为原数据段。
其中，对多个等大小的原数据包进行编码获得编码包的方式和第一种可能的实现流程中的方式1类似，其与方式1的不同在于，编码后，发端发送一个或多个原始数据及该一个或多个原始数据的头信息，以及，编码获得的冗余包中的一个或多个。
可以理解的是，网络编码层的输入可以为一个或多个原始的数据单元，如原始数据，网络编码层的输出可以为一个或多个PDU，该一个或多个PDU可以包括前述的原数据包和冗余包，或者，前述的系统包和冗余包。其中，输出该一个或多个PDU可理解为通过通信接口在终端设备内或网络设备内将该一个或多个PDU输出给后续处理该一个或多个PDU的模块。可以理解，本申请中涉及的输出可以是指在空口上发送信号，也可以指在装置(例如，终端设备或网络设备)内通过通信接口将信号输出给该装置内的其他模块。具体过程在应用场景中具体描述，在此不予赘述。
具体的编码操作以RLNC为例进行简要说明。RLNC方案以一个编码块(block)，为一个编码单元，一个编码块中包括多个大小相同的原数据包，通过构建编码系数矩阵对原数据包进行编码可以得到一组编码包。通常，编码系数矩阵中的系数在有限域，如伽罗华域(Galois field，GF)中随机选取。参见图8，图8是随机线性网络编码的示意图。如图8所示，编码系数矩阵(即图8中的A (W+R)×W)大小为(W+R)×W，即(W+R)行W列，其中，该示例中，编码系数矩阵中的一个行向量称为一个编码系数向量，通过对一个包含W个原数据包的编码块(图8中的X W×1)进行网络编码，得到W+R个编码数据(图8中的Y (W+R)×1)，对应的码率表示为W/(W+R)，或者，对应的冗余率表示为R/(W+R)。其中，编码系数矩阵在GF(q)域中随机选择系数，q表示伽罗华域的大小，伽罗华域的取值为区间[0,q-1]。W和R均是正整数。应理解，RLNC方案中，各个编码块之间没有关联，其中，对一个包含W个原数据包的编码块进行网络编码得到的W+R个编码数据，即编码操作对每个独立的编码块进行，每个编码块的冗余(码率)可以相同，也可以不相同。编码端/发送设备将W个原数据包和生成的W+R个编码数据统一加包头信息后发送，译码端/接收设备接收到至少W个正确且编码系数向量线性无关的编码包时，或者，接收到至少W个正确的编码包且接收到的编码包对应的编码系数矩阵的秩为W时，即可正确译码并恢复出W个原数据包。这是因为编码包融合了若干个原数据包的信息，所以接收设备可以用编码包来恢复原数据包。
下面对本申请涉及的一些术语进行介绍。
系统包：由原数据包乘以为单位向量的编码系数生成的编码数据加编码包包头，或是， 原数据包直接加编码包包头得到。例如，原数据包采用大小为(W+R)×W的编码系数矩阵(即图8中的A(W+R)×W)进行网络编码得到W+R个编码数据，其中编码系数矩阵可以写成
Figure PCTCN2022107660-appb-000001
其中前W行构成的子矩阵I W是单位阵，由W个单位向量构成，获得的W+R个编码数据中对应于I W部分的W个编码数据即为W个系统包的数据部分，对编码数据加包头信息即为系统包。
冗余包：由对原数据包进行网络编码生成，冗余包的编码系数为非单位向量。比如，采用大小为(W+R)×W的编码系数矩阵(即图8中的A(W+R)×W)进行网络编码得到W+R个编码数据，其中编码系数矩阵可以写成
Figure PCTCN2022107660-appb-000002
W+R个编码数据中对应于G R×W部分的R个编码数据即为R个冗余编码包的数据部分，对该R个编码数据加包头信息即为冗余包。在本申请实施例中，术语“冗余包”还可以称为“校验包”，两者可替换使用。
网络编码分组：分组码相关的术语，分组码中网络编码分组是包含了多个原数据包的集合。例如，将每W个原数据包分为一个网络编码分组进行独立网络编码可以得到与该网络编码分组对应的编码数据。在本申请实施例中，术语“网络编码分组”还可以称为“网络编码块”，“编码分组”，或“编码块”。
网络编码窗：网络编码窗是针对包含滑动窗口的网络编码方案或卷积码使用的术语，网络编码窗是包含了多个原数据包的集合，不同的网络编码窗包含的原数据包可以部分相同。例如，对L个原数据包采用滑动窗口的方式获得W个原数据包，L和W均为正整数且L不小于W，作为当前的网络编码窗，并对该网络编码窗内的W个原数据包进行网络编码，获得与该网络编码窗对应的编码数据，对网络编码窗进行滑动，可以获得又一组原数据包作为待编码的数据包，需要说明的是，网络编码窗的大小在滑动前后可以不同，网络编码窗的大小是指网络编码窗包含的原数据包的个数，网络编码窗在滑动前后包含的原数据包可以部分相同。在本申请实施例中，术语“网络编码窗”还可以称为“网络编码窗口”，“网络编码滑动窗口”，“编码窗口”，“编码窗”，“滑动窗口”，或，“滑动窗”等。
网络编码编码深度：网络编码窗是针对包含滑动窗口的网络编码方案或卷积码使用的术语，网络编码编码深度是网络编码窗内被编码的原数据包的个数，或者网络编码窗的大小。例如，对L个原数据包采用滑动窗口的方式获得W个原数据包，L和W均为正整数且L不小于W，作为当前的网络编码窗，并对该网络编码窗内的W个原数据包进行网络编码，获得与该网络编码窗对应的编码数据，那么当前的网络编码编码深度为W。在本申请实施例中，术语“网络编码编码深度”还可以称为“网络编码卷积深度”，“编码深度”，“卷积深度”，“滑动窗口大小”，“滑动窗大小”，或，“窗大小”等。
网络编码卷积深度：同“网络编码编码深度”。
网络编码滑动窗口：同“网络编码窗”。
有限域：也称伽罗瓦域，是仅含有限个元素的域，可进行加法、减法、乘法和除法运算，且加、减、乘和除运算结果不会超出域的集合。
对应于网络编码的译码情况，所述译码情况指示一段时间内对应于网络编码分组或者网络编码滑动窗口的译码的成功率和/或失败率，其中，网络编码分组或网络编码滑动窗口中的全部的原数据包均译码成功，称作该网络编码分组或者网络编码滑动窗口译码成功，否则，称作该网络编码分组或者网络编码滑动窗口译码失败，成功率即一段时间内译码成功的网络编码分组占所有网络编码分组的比例，或者，一段时间内译码成功的网络编码滑 动窗口占所有网络编码滑动窗口的比例，失败率即一段时间内译码失败的网络编码分组占所有网络编码分组的比例，或者，一段时间内译码失败的网络编码滑动窗口占所有网络编码滑动窗口的比例。
网络编码码率：网络编码码率是指原数据包的个数与编码包的个数的比值，或者，网络编码码率是指当前编码窗内新参与编码的原数据包个数与当前编码窗对应的总数据包的个数的比值，或者，当前网络编码窗包含的原数据包的个数与当前网络编码窗对应的编码包的个数的比值。其中，新参与编码的原数据包个数是滑动窗口滑动后包含的原数据包的个数减去滑动后与滑动前包含的相同的原数据包的个数，编码包的个数为系统包的个数与冗余包的个数之和，或者，为冗余包的个数。
网络编码层：网络编码层是指具有网络编码功能的协议层，网络编码层可以是具有网络编码功能的RRC层、SDAP层、PDCP层、BAP层、RLC层、MAC层，或PHY层等协议层中的一项或多项。具体是哪层在本申请中不予限定。网络编码层也可以是除上述协议层以外的一个新协议层，例如，该新协议层可以在PDCP层之上，在BAP层之上，在PDCP层和RLC层之间，在RLC层和MAC层之间，或者在MAC层和PHY层之间，新协议层的位置在本申请中可以不予限定。在本申请实施例中，术语“网络编码层”也可以称为“编解码层”，“编译码层”，“网络编解码层”，“网络编译码层”，“网络编/解码层”，“网络编/译码层”或者其它名称，在本申请中不进行限定。
对应于网络编码的译码：网络编码的译码是网络编码的逆过程，利用接收到的编码数据，通过对编码数据对应矩阵的逆矩阵与编码数据相乘可以恢复出原数据包。
编码数据对应矩阵的秩(rank)：可以反映编码系数向量线性无关的数据包的个数。
协议数据单元(protocol data unit，PDU)：协议实体之间传递的数据单元，PDU包含来自上层的信息和当前层的实体附加的信息，这个PDU会被传送到下一较低的层。
服务数据单元(service data unit，PDCP SDU)：协议层之间传递的数据单元，是来自上层的数据或者要传给上层的数据。
下面结合流程图对本申请实施例提供的方法进行说明。
应理解，本申请实施例提供的方法可由发送设备和接收设备执行。其中，发送设备可以是前述基站，也可以是宿主节点，例如：集成接入回传(integrated access backhaul，IAB)宿主(IAB donor，integrated access and backhaul，接入回传一体化宿主)。接收设备可以是UE，也可以是中继节点，例如IAB节点。后续以UE为例介绍由接收设备执行的动作，以及以基站为例介绍由发送设备执行的动作，由其他接收节点执行的动作可参照UE的动作，由其他发送节点执行的动作可参照基站的动作。
应理解，在切换场景下，UE可能从一个发送设备切换(称为源发送设备)至另一个发送设备(称为目标发送设备)，例如，源发送设备可以是源基站，目标发送设备可以是目标基站。下面以UE、源网络设备和目标网络设备为执行主体为例，对本申请实施例提供的方法进行说明。其中，源网络设备可以是源基站，或者是CU-DU分离场景下源基站的gNB-CU(以下称为源gNB-CU)，和/或，目标网络设备可以是目标基站，或者是CU-DU分离场景下目标基站的gNB-CU(以下称为目标gNB-CU)。
在本申请后续的说明中，以源发送设备是源基站、目标发送设备是目标基站，且接收设备是UE，网络编码为分组码为例，对本申请实施例提供的数据发送或接收方法进行说 明。可以理解的是，本申请实施例也可以适用于网络编码为卷积码。本申请实施例可以应用于切换场景，或者，双连接场景，以下均以切换场景为例进行描述。其中，切换场景中，目标发送设备为UE执行切换后与UE通信的设备，源发送设备为UE执行切换前与UE通信的设备。
如图9所示，本申请实施例提供的数据发送或接收方法可包括以下步骤：
S101：源基站向UE发送第一数据包。
应理解，本申请不限定源基站执行网络编码功能的处理的协议层(后续可将该协议层称为第一协议层)。该第一协议层可以是SDAP层、PDCP层或RLC层中的一个。例如，以第一协议层是SDAP层为例，源基站的PDCP层接收的PDCP SDU为经过SDAP执行网络编码功能的处理后的数据包，此时源基站的PDCP层可对PDCP SDU进行PDCP层处理，获得PDCP PDU。又如，以PDCP层执行网络编码功能的处理为例，源基站的PDCP层可对PDCP SDU执行网络编码功能的处理，并执行PDCP层处理，获得PDCP PDU并向UE发送。其中，对PDCP SDU执行网络编码的过程可参见本申请对于图7(a)和/或图7(b)的描述，但不应理解为仅限于采用图7(a)和图7(b)所示方法执行网络编码功能的处理。
本申请中，第一数据包可以包括原数据包和/或第一冗余包，或者，第一数据包可包括系统包和/或第一冗余包，其中，第一冗余包是根据原数据包进行网络编码操作获得的，系统包根据原数据包获得，且原数据包是根据原始数据获得的。本申请中，原始数据是第一协议层的待执行网络编码功能处理的SDU。例如，在源基站采用如图7(a)所示方法进行网络编码功能的处理时，源基站向UE第一数据包可以包括冗余包EPkt1和冗余包EPkt2。又如，在源基站采用如图7(b)所示方法进行网络编码功能的处理时，第一数据包可包括系统包EPkt1～EPkt4和冗余包EPkt5～EPkt6。
相应地，UE接收第一数据包，之后执行网络编码功能的处理相应的译码过程，具体可参照本申请对于图7(a)和/或图7(b)所示的UE的译码过程的描述。
S102：UE向源基站发送第一信息，第一信息可用于指示UE对于第一数据包的接收情况。
具体的，第一信息可指示UE根据第一数据包恢复的第二协议层的SDU中的第一SDU，该第二协议层例如是PDCP层。其中，第二协议层的SDU对应于原始数据(即第一协议层的SDU)，或者说，第二协议层的SDU是根据原始数据获得的第二协议层的全部SDU。第一SDU是UE根据第一数据包恢复出的第二协议层的SDU，第一SDU包括第二协议层的SDU中的部分或全部SDU。
或者，第一信息可指示待接收的冗余包的个数信息，该待接收的冗余包可用于UE恢复原始数据。此时第一信息可用于请求待接收的冗余包。例如，UE存在n个未恢复的第一SDU，则UE可通过第一信息指示其待接收的冗余包的数量为n，以请求不少于n个冗余包。
或者，UE正确接收的第一数据包的个数信息。源基站可根据该个数信息确定UE未正确接收的第一数据包的个数，则源基站可将不少于该个数的第二冗余包发送至目标基站。
或者，第一信息可指示UE未正确接收(或错误接收)的第一数据包的个数信息，则源基站可将不少于该个数的第二冗余包发送至目标基站。
此外，本申请实施例提供的方法还可以用于RLC层的UM模式或AM模式的传输场景中。其中，在AM模式下，第一信息可以是RLC状态报告，或者是RLC状态报告外的 一个反馈信息，用于触发源基站向目标基站发送第二数据。在UM模式下，第一信息还可以是UE切换至目标基站前向源基站发送的PDCP状态报告。源基站可在UE切换到目标基站之前，向UE发送指示信息，用于指示UE向源基站发送该PDCP状态报告。或者，第一信息可以是切换至目标基站前UE向源基站发送的其他反馈信息。
相应地，源基站接收第一信息。
S103：源基站根据第一信息向目标基站发送第二数据包，该第二数据包用于UE恢复第一数据包的原始数据。
本申请中，第二数据包的类型可包括冗余包类型，或者说，第二数据包包括第二冗余包，该第二冗余包对应于原始数据。这里对应于原始数据，是指第二数据包是根据原始数据经过网络编码操作所获得的冗余包。其中，第二冗余包可以与第一冗余包相同，也可以是源基站在收到第一信息后，重新经过网络编码操作获得的冗余包，其中，获得第二冗余包的编码系数矩阵与获得第一数据包的编码系数矩阵可以相同或不同，本申请不具体限定。
第二数据包还可包括第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU，该第二协议层的SDU对应于第一协议层的SDU，且第二SDU不包括第一SDU。其中，第一SDU是UE根据第一数据包恢复出的第二协议层的SDU，也就是说，第二SDU为UE根据第一数据包未恢复出的第二协议层的SDU。以第二协议层是PDCP层为例，第二SDU可以是PDCP SDU中UE未恢复出的第二PDCP SDU。
第二数据包还可包括原数据包对应的一组第二协议层的SDU。其中，该一组第二协议层的SDU对应于同一个编码块(卷积码则对应同一个编码窗)，即这些第二协议层的SDU所对应的第一协议层的SDU作为一组SDU执行网络编码操作。其中，该一组第二协议层的SDU中，包括UE根据第一数据包未恢复出的第二协议层的SDU。以第二协议层是PDCP层为例，一组第二协议层的SDU可以是对应于同一个编码块的一组PDCP SDU。
相应地，目标基站接收第二数据包。
S104：目标基站向UE发送第三数据包，第三数据包根据第二数据包获得。其中，根据第二数据包获得第三数据包的方式例如，对第二数据包执行PDCP层处理和/或网络编码处理获得第三数据包。例如，第二数据包为PDCP SDU，第三数据包可以是PDCP PDU。
可选的，如果第二数据包包括第二冗余包，或包括第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU，则目标基站不需要对第二冗余包进行网络编码操作，例如，目标基站可将第二数据作为第三数据包发送至第三数据包。如果第二数据包包括原始数据对应的一组第二协议层的SDU，则目标基站可对第二冗余包进行网络编码操作。
相应地，UE可接收第三数据包，并根据第三数据包恢复原始数据。
采用图9所示方法，源基站可根据第一信息获知UE在切换前对于第一数据包的接收情况，源基站还可根据第一信息向目标基站发送第二数据包，使得UE根据从目标基站接收的数据包恢复第一数据包对应的原始数据，使得UE在切换后仍然能够获得切换前的原始数据，避免丢包，因此可提高传输可靠性。
此外，第一信息还可指示UE对第一数据包成功译码，则此时源基站不需要向目标基站发送第二数据包。源基站可根据该第一信息或者UE在切换前未发生丢包，则不需要源基站向目标基站转发数据，以节省基站间信令和处理开销。
下面结合示例对本申请实施例提供的方法中，源基站向目标基站发送第二数据包的方式。应理解，以下示例中以第一数据包包括系统包和第一冗余包为例，在实际应用中第一 数据包也可包括原数据包和第一冗余包，本申请不具体限定。另外，以下示例中以CU-DU分离的基站部署方式为例进行说明，根据实际需要，以下说明中的源基站可替换为源gNB-CU，目标基站可以替换为目标gNB-CU，实际应用中也可将CU-DU分离部署的基站替换为CU和DU合并部署的基站。
示例1
示例1中，以源基站和目标基站均支持网络编码功能，且网络编码功能位于PDCP层内为例进行说明。另外，示例1以切换前源基站向UE发送包括系统包和冗余包的编码包，且切换后目标基站向UE发送包括系统包和冗余包的编码包的方案(即图7(b)示意的方案)为例进行说明。
示例1可包括以下步骤1至步骤3：
步骤1，源基站向UE发送PDCP PDU，PDCP PDU中包含系统包或冗余包。
源基站对收到的多个PDCP SDU(可称为原始数据)执行网络编码功能的处理后生成编码包(包括系统包和冗余包)，再对生成的编码包添加PDCP包头后生成PDCP PDU。如图10所示，源基站对收到的PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3进行网络编码功能的处理后生成4个编码包(包括2个系统包和2个冗余包)，然后对4个编码包添加PDCP头操作后生成PDCP PDU0(包含系统包1)、PDCP PDU1(包含系统包2)、PDCP PDU2(包含冗余包1)和PDCP PDU3(包含冗余包2)，即PDCP PDU0～PDCP PDU3作为第一数据包。也就是说，编码包和PDCP PDU一一对应，即：一个编码包对应一个PDCP PDU。
步骤2，源基站接收UE发送的第一信息。
源基站接收UE发送的第一信息。相应的，UE向源基站发送第一信息。
该第一信息用于指示UE接收编码包的情况，包括以下至少一种信息：
成功译码PDCP PDU0～PDCP PDU3的指示信息、成功接收的PDCP SDU的信息、待接收的冗余包的个数信息、正确接收第一数据包(或PDCP PDU)的个数信息，或者未正确接收第一数据包(或PDCP PDU)的个数信息。
步骤3，源基站根据第一信息向目标基站进行数据转发。
本申请中除特殊说明外，转发是指源基站根据第一信息向目标基站转发数据。
源基站在Xn接口上向目标基站进行数据转发(所转发的数据可称为转发数据，包括但不限于第二数据包，还可包括源基站尚未经过PDCP层处理的PDCP SDU，和/或，在源基站上已经执行网络编码功能的处理但尚未发送给UE的PDCP SDU)。在示例1中，转发数据的类型至少包括冗余包类型，或者说，示例1中的第二数据包的类型为冗余包类型。此外，示例1中转发数据的类型可能还包括SDU类型。
下面根据转发数据的类型分别进行说明。
a.源基站会在Xn接口向目标基站转发第二冗余包。该第二冗余包即第二数据包。
作为一种可能的实现方式，源基站根据UE发送的第一信息向目标基站转发第二冗余包。转发的第二冗余包可以包括源基站尚未发送给UE的冗余包。其中，转发第二冗余包的个数大于或等于UE成功译码出原始数据还需要接收的冗余包的个数。
示例性的，若第一信息为UE请求第二冗余包的个数信息，则UE成功译码恢复出原始数据还需要接收的冗余包的数量可以由第一信息指示。或者，若第一信息为UE正确接收第一数据包的个数信息，则源基站根据第一信息可以确定UE成功译码恢复出原始数据还需要接收的第二冗余包的数量。或者，第一信息为UE未正确接收编码包的个数信息， 则源基站可根据第一信息以及源基站已经向UE发送的第一数据包的数量信息，确定UE成功译码恢复出原始数据还需要接收的第二冗余包的数量。
如图10所示，源基站对收到的PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3进行网络编码功能的处理后生成4个编码包(包括2个系统包和2个冗余包)，然后对4个编码包添加PDCP头操作后生成PDCP PDU0(包含系统包1)、PDCP PDU1(包含系统包2)、PDCP PDU2(包含冗余包1)和PDCP PDU3(包含冗余包2)，PDCP PDU0～PDCP PDU3即第一数据包，或称为编码包。应理解，本申请中，PDCP PDUn是指SN＝n的PDCP PDU，n为非负整数。例如，图10中的PDCP PDU0是指图10中SN＝0的PDCP PDU，PDCP PDU1是指图10中SN＝1的PDCP PDU，PDCP PDU2是指图10中SN＝2的PDCP PDU，以此类推。
假设UE成功接收3个编码包就可以成功译码恢复原始数据PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3，可是由于UE只收到PDCP PDU0和PDCP PDU2，即：UE只成功接收2个编码包(即：系统包1和冗余包1)，还差1个编码包就可以成功译码恢复PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3。此时UE向源基站发送的第一信息可包括：请求1个冗余包的信息、正确接收2个编码包的信息，或者，未正确接收2个编码包的信息。
根据该第一信息，源基站在Xn接口上不会转发PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3，而是转发由这一组PDCP SDU进行网络编码功能处理获得的第二冗余包，例如：转发的第二冗余包为收到第一信息后根据PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3进行网络编码功能的处理后生成的冗余包，称为冗余包3。可选的，冗余包3为源基站尚未发送的冗余包，与冗余包1和冗余包2均不同。
可选的，上例中，第一信息还可以是DDDS反馈(仅适用于源基站采用CU-DU分离架构)或RLC状态报告，则源基站可根据该第一信息在Xn接口上转发的冗余包3为UE尚未成功接收的第二冗余包或UE待接收的冗余包。此时第一信息中可包括UE正确接收的第一数据包的信息，和/或，UE未成功接收的第一数据包的信息。例如图10所示，第一信息为DDDS反馈时，DDDS反馈中可包括成功接收PDCH PDU0和PDCP PDU2的信息、未成功接收PDCP PDU1和PDCP PDU3的信息等，源基站可根据DDDS反馈获知UE尚未成功接收到冗余包2，则源基站向目标基站转发的第二冗余包可以是冗余包2(即：PDCP PDU3中包含的冗余包)。
b.除了转发第二冗余包，源基站还可在Xn接口上向目标基站转发PDCP SDU。
其中，Xn接口转发的PDCP SDU包括源基站尚未经过PDCP层处理的PDCP SDU，和/或，包括在源基站上已经执行网络编码功能的处理但尚未发送给UE的PDCP SDU。如图10所示，源基站尚未对收到的PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6进行PDCP层处理(PDCP层处理指的是关联PDCP SN、头压缩、加密/完整性保护处理，或者添加PDCP头等处理中的至少一项)，或者，源基站对收到的PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6进行网络编码功能的处理但尚未生成PDCP PDU，或者，源基站对收到的PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6进行网络编码功能的处理和添加PDCP包头后生成PDCP PDU，但生成的PDCP PDU尚未发送给UE，则源基站可通过Xn接口向目标基站(目标gNB-CU)发送PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6。对于图10所示示例，第三数据包可包括目标基站生成的PDCP PDU4。
因此在示例1中，源基站可能会在Xn接口上向目标基站转发第二冗余包和PDCP SDU。 其中，对于冗余包类型的第二数据包，目标基站不需要再执行网络编码功能的处理，而对于PDCP SDU，目标基站需要执行网络编码功能的处理。为了让目标基站能够区分从源基站接收的转发数据的类型，可选的，源基站可向目标基站发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第二数据包的类型为冗余包类型。例如，当源基站向目标基站发送的第二数据包包括第二冗余包时，第一指示信息可用于指示第二数据包的类型为冗余包类型，目标基站可忽略对第二数据包执行网络编码处理。
或者，第一指示信息可用于指示哪些转发数据需要目标基站执行网络编码功能的处理，或，用于指示哪些转发数据不需要执行网络编码功能的处理，对于第一指示信息指示的不需要执行网络编码功能的处理的数据包，目标基站可忽略对第二数据包执行网络编码处理。例如，第一指示信息为1bit的指示信息，当该指示信息的取值为0时表示需要目标基站对转发数据执行网络编码功能的处理，当该指示信息的取值为1时表示不需要目标基站对转发数据执行网络编码功能的处理。
示例性的，如果在Xn接口通过GTP隧道向目标基站进行数据的转发，源基站可在GTP隧道的GTP头字段中携带该第一指示信息。例如：仅当源基站向目标基站转发第二冗余包时，该GTP隧道的GTP头字段中携带该第一指示信息，当转发PDCP SDU时，GTP隧道的GTP头字段中不携带该第一指示信息。另外，也可由源发送设备向目标发送设备发送该GTP隧道的标识(如GTP TEID)。进一步的，由源发送设备向目标发送设备发送对应关系，该对应关系包括该GTP隧道的标识与第一指示信息之间的对应关系，以便目标发送设备获知第一指示信息用于指示哪个第二数据包是否需要执行网络编码功能的处理。例如，源发送设备向目标发送设备发送XnAp消息，其中可携带该GTP隧道的标识和该GTP隧道的标识对应的第一指示信息，或者，携带该对应关系。
可选的，源基站还可以向目标基站发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于目标基站确定执行网络编码功能处理的第一个编码块的信息。示例性的，该第三指示信息为block标识(identifier，ID)。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该第三指示信息可用于指示在目标基站上执行网络编码功能处理的第一个编码块的信息。如图10所示，源基站对PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3进行分割、级联、加padding等处理中的一项或多项得到多个等大小的原数据包，并将这些原数据包构成一个编码块进行编码运算和添加编码包包头后生成编码包，其中，该生成的编码包的编码包头中会携带对应的编码块标识(block ID)，例如：block ID 0，则UE切换时，源基站将包含block ID 1的第三指示信息发送到目标基站。根据block ID 1的指示信息，目标基站对PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6执行网络编码功能的处理生成编码包，该生成的编码包的编码包头中会携带对应的编码块标识block ID1。对UE而言，UE只能将属于同一个block ID的编码包进行联合译码才能保证译码成功，即：属于block ID 0的编码包进行联合译码才能恢复出PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3，属于block ID 1的编码包进行联合译码才能恢复出PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6。而如果目标基站从PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6对应的编码包重新设置编码块标识，可能导致该编码包的编码块标识与来自于源基站的冗余包的编码块标识冲突，造成UE解码失败。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，该第三指示信息可用于指示在源基站上执行网络编码功能处理的最后一个编码块的信息，目标基站根据该第三指示信息获知在目标基站上执行网 络编码功能处理的第一个编码块的编号。例如图10所示，源基站上PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3进行分割、级联、加padding等处理中的一项或多项得到多个等大小的原数据包，并将这些原数据包构成一个编码块进行编码运算和添加编码包包头后生成编码包，其中，该生成的编码包的编码包头中会携带对应的编码块标识，例如：block ID 0，则UE切换时，源基站将包含block ID 0的第三指示信息发送到目标基站。根据block ID 0的指示信息，目标基站对PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6执行网络编码功能的处理生成编码包，该生成的编码包的编码包头中会携带对应的编码块标识block ID1。对UE而言，UE只能将属于同一个block ID的编码包进行联合译码才能保证译码成功，即：属于block ID 0的编码包进行联合译码才能恢复出PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3，属于block ID 1的编码包进行联合译码才能恢复出PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6。
示例性的，该第三指示信息可以携带在现有的SN状态迁移消息中，或者，该第三指示信息也可以携带在GTP头字段中随转发数据一起发送。
以上示例1中以切换前后源基站和目标基站分别向UE发送编码包的方案为例进行说明(即图7(b)示例的方法，编码包包括系统包和冗余包)。示例1同样适用于切换前后源基站和目标基站分别向UE发送原数据包和冗余包的方案(即图7(a)示意的方案)或其他网络编码方案。针对切换前后源基站和目标基站分别向UE发送原数据包和冗余包的方案中,需要将上述描述中的系统包替换成原数据包，编码包替换成原数据包和冗余包，这里就不再赘述。
示例2
示例2中，以源基站和目标基站均支持网络编码功能，且网络编码功能位于PDCP层内为例进行说明。另外，示例2以切换前源gNB-CU向UE发送包括系统包和冗余包的编码包，且切换后目标gNB-CU向UE发送包括系统包和冗余包的编码包的方案(即图7(b)示意的方案)为例进行说明。
在示例2中，第二数据包包括第二PDCP SDU，该第二PDCP SDU为UE在切换前尚未成功恢复的PDCP SDU，或者说，第二PDCP SDU不包括UE根据在切换前成功恢复的PDCP SDU。具体的，示例2中的转发数据包括源基站尚未经过PDCP层处理的PDCP SDU，和/或，包括第二PDCP SDU。
如图11所示，示例2中，源基站可对收到的PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3进行网络编码功能的处理后生成4个编码包(包括2个系统包和2个冗余包)，然后对4个编码包添加PDCP头操作后生成PDCP PDU0(包含系统包1)、PDCP PDU1(包含系统包2)、PDCP PDU2(包含冗余包1)和PDCP PDU3(包含冗余包2)，即PDCP PDU0～PDCP PDU3作为第一数据包。由于UE只成功收到PDCP PDU0和PDCP PDU2，其中，PDCP PDU0中包含系统包1，该系统包1包含完整的PDCP SDU1,因此，UE可以通过收到的PDCP PDU0成功恢复出PDCP SDU1。假设UE成功接收3个编码包就可以成功译码恢复原始数据PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3，可是由于UE只收到PDCP PDU0和PDCP PDU2，即：UE只成功接收2个编码包(即：系统包1和冗余包1)，因此，UE无法恢复出PDCP SDU 2和PDCP SDU 3，则第一SDU为PDCP SDU 2和PDCP SDU 3。此时UE向源基站发送的第一信息可包括UE成功恢复出的PDCP SDU1的信息，或者包括UE未恢 复出的PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3的信息。
因此，UE切换过程中，源gNB-CU只将PDCP SDU 2和PDCP SDU 3转发到目标gNB-CU，也就是说第二PDCP SDU包括PDCP SDU 2和PDCP SDU 3。此外，源gNB-CU还可以将PDCP SDU 4、PDCP SDU 5和PDCP SDU 6转发到目标gNB-CU。其中，PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6的转发处理同示例1中相同，这里不再赘述。对于图11所示示例，第三数据包可包括目标基站生成的PDCP PDU4和PDCP PDU5。
应理解，虽然目标gNB-CU从Xn接口上收到的都是PDCP SDU，但是对于不同PDCP SDU处理不同。其中，PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3是不需要目标基站执行网络编码功能的处理的(因为需要以PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3为一组进行网络编码功能的处理，但是源基站没有转发PDCP SDU1)，目标基站可根据PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3获得图11所示PDCP PDU4和PDCP PDU5，而PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6需要目标基站执行网络编码功能的处理，经过网络编码处理所获得的PDCP PDU包括PDCP PDU6～PDCP PDU9。为了让目标基站对这些PDCP SDU的处理方式进行区分，存在两种实现方式：
作为一种可能的实现方式，源基站向目标基站转发数据时需要额外指示通过Xn接口转发的PDCP SDU是否需要执行网络编码功能的处理，例如，源基站向目标基站发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示目标基站是否对通过Xn接口转发的PDCP SDU执行网络编码功能的处理。其中，该第二指示信息可以是显示的指示信息，例如，第二指示信息用于显示指示是否对通过Xn接口转发的PDCP SDU执行网络编码功能的处理。或者，该第二指示信息也可以是隐式的指示信息，例如：该第二指示信息为block ID，对目标基站而言，仅对携带第二指示信息的转发PDCP SDU执行网络编码功能的处理，对于未携带第二指示信息的转发PDCP SDU不执行网络编码功能的处理。可选的，第二指示信息还可用于指示第二数据包的类型是否为SDU类型，如果第二数据包为第二PDCP SDU，则第二指示信息可指示第二数据包的类型为SDU类型，相应地，当第二指示信息指示第二数据包的类型为SDU类型时，目标基站不需要对第二数据包执行网络编码功能的处理。
示例性的，该第二指示信息可以携带在Xn接口的GTP头字段中。例如图11所示，源gNB-CU向目标gNB-CU转发PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3时，在GTP头字段中携带第二指示信息来指示PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3在目标基站上不需要执行网络编码功能的处理，源gNB-CU向目标gNB-CU转发PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6时，在GTP头字段中携带第二指示信息来指示PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6在目标基站上需要执行网络编码功能的处理。
或者，源gNB-CU向目标gNB-CU转发PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3时，在GTP头字段中携带第二指示信息来指示PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3在目标基站上不需要执行网络编码功能的处理，源gNB-CU向目标gNB-CU转发PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6时，在GTP头字段中不携带该第二指示信息，则目标基站对未携带第二指示信息的PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6默认执行网络编码功能的处理。
或者，源gNB-CU向目标gNB-CU转发PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3时，在GTP头字段中不携带第二指示信息，则目标基站对未携带第二指示信息的PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3默认不执行网络编码功能的处理，源gNB-CU向目标gNB-CU转发PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6时，在GTP头字段中携带第二指示信息来指示PDCP SDU4、 PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6在目标基站上需要执行网络编码功能的处理。
可选的，第二指示信息可指示目标基站上执行网络编码功能处理的起始PDCP SDU的信息。示例性的，起始PDCP SDU的信息包括该PDCP SDU对应的SN编号。例如图11所示，目标基站从PDCP SDU 4开始执行网络编码功能的处理，则第二指示信息包括PDCP SDU4对应的SN编号，则目标基站不需要对PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3执行网络编码功能的处理。
可选的，类似于示例1中源基站向目标基站发送的第三指示信息，在示例2中源基站还可向目标基站发送第三指示信息，用于目标基站确定执行网络编码功能处理的第一个编码块的信息。第三指示信息的实现方式可参照示例1中前述第三指示信息的实现方式，这里不再赘述。例如，该第三指示信息可用于指示在目标基站上执行网络编码功能处理的第一个编码块的编号，或者，该第三指示信息可用于指示在源基站上执行网络编码功能处理的最后一个编码块的编号。
在示例2中，由于UE从目标基站接收的PDCP PDU包括经过网络编码功能处理的PDCP PDU(如图11所示的PDCP PDU6～PDCP PDU9)和没有经过网络编码功能处理的PDCP PDU(如图11所示的PDCP PDU4和PDCP PDU5)，因此为了能让UE对收到的PDCP PDU进行区分，需要目标基站向UE发送第五指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示PDCP PDU是否经过网络编码功能的处理，或者，用于指示PDCP PDU是否需要执行网络译码的处理，以便UE对收到的PDCP PDU进行不同处理。
可选的，该第五指示信息可以是显示的指示，即：显示指示PDCP PDU是否经过网络编码功能的处理，或者，显示指示PDCP PDU是否需要执行网络译码的处理；或，该第五指示信息可以是隐式的指示，即：指示PDCP PDU的有效净荷中携带的是编码包或PDCP SDU。
示例性的，目标基站可在PDCP头字段新增指示信息(即第五指示信息)，用于指示该PDCP PDU是否需要执行网络译码的处理。该第五指示信息可以是1比特信息，例如，当该1比特信息取值为0时，用于指示该PDCP PDU需要执行网络译码的处理，当该1比特信息取值为1时，用于指示该PDCP PDU不需要执行网络译码的处理。以图11为例，目标基站未对PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3进行网络编码功能的处理，并可以沿用现有机制将PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3经过PDCP层处理后分别生成对应的PDCP PDU4和PDCP PDU5发送给UE，PDCP PDU4和PDCP PDU5中可携带指示未经过网络编码功能的处理的第五指示信息。目标基站还可对PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6经过网络编码的处理生成编码包，然后对编码包添加PDCP头操作后生成对应的PDCP PDU6～PDCP SDU9发送给UE，PDCP PDU6～PDCP SDU9中可携带指示经过网络编码功能的处理的第五指示信息，则相应的，UE根据PDCP头字段中携带的第五指示信息，来获知收到的PDCP PDU是否需要执行网络译码的处理，若指示不需要执行网络译码的处理，则UE沿用现有机制将PDCP PDU直接恢复出对应的PDCP SDU，若指示需要执行网络译码的处理，则UE将PDCP PDU经过网络译码功能的处理后再恢复出对应的PDCP SDU。
例如，UE接收目标基站发送的PDCP PDU4和PDCP PDU5，其中，PDCP头字段中携带的第五指示信息指示PDCP PDU4和PDCP PDU5不需要执行网络译码的处理，UE还接收目标基站发送的PDCP PDU6～PDCP SDU9，其中，PDCP PDU6～PDCP SDU9的PDCP头字段中携带的第五指示信息指示该PDCP PDU需要执行网络译码的处理。
或者，UE接收目标基站发送的PDCP PDU4和PDCP PDU5，其中，若PDCP头字段中没有携带第五指示信息，则UE默认PDCP PDU4和PDCP PDU5不需要执行网络译码的处理；UE接收目标基站发送的PDCP PDU6～PDCP SDU9，其中，若PDCP PDU6～PDCP SDU9的PDCP头字段中携带的第五指示信息指示需要执行网络译码的处理，则UE需要对PDCP PDU6～PDCP SDU9执行网络译码的处理。
或者，UE接收目标基站发送的PDCP PDU4和PDCP PDU5，其中，PDCP头字段中携带的第五指示信息，则UE不需要对PDCP PDU4和PDCP PDU5执行网络译码的处理；UE接收目标基站发送的PDCP PDU6～PDCP SDU9，其中，若PDCP PDU6～PDCP SDU9的PDCP头字段中没有携带第五指示信息，则UE默认PDCP PDU6～PDCP SDU9需要执行网络译码的处理。
可选的，UE还可以根据从目标基站接收的PDCP PDU的大小来确定是否需要对来自于目标基站的PDCP PDU执行网络译码的处理。因为不同的编码包的大小是相同的，导致不同编码包各自添加PDCP包头后的PDCP PDU大小也是相同的，但PDCP SDU大小一般是不同的，导致不同的PDCP SDU直接生成的PDCP PDU大小是不同的。UE若收到PDCP PDU的大小是相同的，则可以认为该PDCP PDU的有效净荷中携带的是编码包，则需要对该PDCP PDU执行网络译码的处理。UE若收到大小相同的PDCP PDU，且收到大小与这些PDCP PDU的大小不同的其他的PDCP PDU，则可以认为该其他的PDCP PDU的有效净荷中携带的是PDCP SDU，则无需对该其他的PDCP PDU执行网络译码的处理，仍然需要对大小相同的PDCP PDU执行网络译码的处理。
示例2以切换前后源基站和目标基站分别向UE发送包括系统包和冗余包的编码包的方案为例进行说明(即图7(b)示例的方法)。示例2同样适用于切换前后源基站和目标基站分别向UE发送原数据包和冗余包的方案(即图7(a)示意的方案)或其他网络编码方案。针对切换前后源基站和目标基站分别向UE发送原数据包和冗余包的方案中,需要将上述描述中的系统包替换成原数据包，编码包替换成原数据包和冗余包，这里就不再赘述。
示例3
示例3中，仍以源基站和目标基站均支持网络编码功能，且网络编码功能位于PDCP层内为例进行说明。另外，示例3以切换前源gNB-CU向UE发送包括系统包和冗余包的编码包，且切换后目标gNB-CU向UE发送包括系统包和冗余包的编码包的方案(即图7(b)示意的方案)为例进行说明。
在示例3中，第二数据包包括对应于同一个编码块的一组PDCP SDU。可选的，该一组PDCP SDU中的至少一个PDCP SDU是UE在切换前根据从源基站接收的数据包未恢复的，或者说，该一组PDCP SDU中包括第二PDCP SDU。此时，源基站可在Xn接口上向目标基站转发PDCP SDU，其中，通过Xn接口转发的PDCP SDU包括源基站尚未经过PDCP层处理的PDCP SDU，和/或，该一组PDCP SDU。
如图12所示，源基站对收到的PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3进行分割、级联、加padding等处理中的一项或多项得到多个等大小的原数据包，并将这些原数据包构成一个编码块进行编码运算和添加编码包包头后生成4个编码包(包括2个系统包和2个冗余包)，然后对4个编码包添加PDCP头操作后生成PDCP PDU0(包含系统包1)、PDCP  PDU1(包含系统包2)、PDCP PDU2(包含冗余包1)和PDCP PDU3(包含冗余包2)，即第一数据包包括PDCP PDU0～PDCP PDU3。其中，该编码块对应PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3。由于UE只成功收到PDCP PDU0和PDCP PDU2，其中，PDCP PDU0中包含系统包1，该系统包1包含完整的PDCP SDU1，因此，UE可以通过收到的PDCP PDU0成功恢复出PDCP SDU1。假设UE成功接收3个编码包就可以成功译码恢复原始数据PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3，可是由于UE只收到PDCP PDU0和PDCP PDU2，即：UE只成功接收2个编码包(即：系统包1和冗余包1)，因此，UE无法恢复出PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU 3，即：UE尚未成功译码恢复出该编码块对应的所有PDCP SDU。因此，UE切换过程中，源gNB-CU需要将PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU 2和PDCP SDU 3都转发到目标gNB-CU，目标基站可根据PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU 2和PDCP SDU 3经过网络编码功能的处理生成PDCP PDU0～PDCP PDU3。此外，源gNB-CU还需要将PDCP SDU 4、PDCP SDU 5和PDCP SDU 6转发到目标gNB-CU，目标基站可根据PDCP SDU 4、PDCP SDU 5和PDCP SDU 6经过网络编码功能的处理生成PDCP PDU4～PDCP PDU7。其中，PDCP SDU4、PDCP SDU5和PDCP SDU6的转发处理同示例1中相同，这里不再赘述。应理解，对于图12所示示例，第三数据包可包括目标基站生成的PDCP PDU0～PDCP PDU3。
对UE而言，切换之前，能够根据源基站发送的PDCP PDU0成功恢复出PDCP SDU1。切换之后，UE根据目标基站发送的PDCP PDU0～PDCP PDU3成功恢复出PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3。为了避免数据包的重复递交(即，避免UE的PDCP层向上层重复递交PDCP SDU1)，UE需要删除从源基站上收到的与PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2、PDCP SDU3对应编码块相关的数据，包括UE删除以下所示的至少一种数据：UE根据从源基站收到的PDCP PDU恢复出的PDCP SDU、UE从源基站收到的与PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3对应的PDCP PDU，或者UE从源基站收到的与PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3对应的PDCP PDU中包含的编码包。其中，UE根据从源基站收到的PDCP PDU恢复出的PDCP SDU可以是由PDCP PDU直接恢复出的PDCP SDU，也可以是由PDCP PDU中包含的编码包通过译码恢复出的PDCP SDU。
如图12所示，UE删除以下至少一种数据：从源基站收到的PDCP PDU0恢复出的PDCP SDU1、从源基站收到的PDCP PDU0和PDCP PDU2、从源基站收到的PDCP PDU0对应的系统包1和PDCP PDU2对应的冗余包1。
可选的，UE可接收一个指示信息(可称为第四指示信息)，该指示信息可用于指示UE删除与一组PDCP SDU中的全部或部分数据重复的数据。例如，第四指示信息可用于指示需要UE删除的重复的PDCP PDU、PDCP PDU对应的编码包，或者通过该PDCP PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包恢复出的PDCP SDU中的至少一个。其中，该指示信息可以是源基站生成的，也可以是目标基站生成的。示例性的，第四指示信息可携带在RRC消息中。
作为一种可能的实现方式，第四指示信息包括block ID(或者block ID列表)，UE根据该指示信息可以确定需要删除的编码包。例如，需要删除编码包中携带的block ID小于或等于该指示信息携带的block ID，以便UE删除这些编码包、通过这些编码包成功恢复出来的PDCP SDU，或者这些编码包对应的PDCP PDU中的至少一个。
作为另一种可能的实现方式，第四指示信息包括PDCP SN(或者PDCP SN列表)。则UE根据该指示信息可以确定需要删除的PDCP PDU，其中，被删除的PDCP PDU包括从 源基站收到的该SN对应的PDCP PDU，从而UE可删除这些PDCP PDU、这些PDCP PDU对应的编码包，或者通过这些编码包成功恢复出来的PDCP SDU中的至少一个。
作为另一种可能的实现方式，第四指示信息包括起始PDCP SN信息和比特位图(bitmap)。其中，起始PDCP SN用于指示从源基站收到的PDCP PDU中，UE需要删除的第一个PDCP PDU，bitmap可用于指示位于该起始PDCP PDU之后的需要删除的PDCP PDU。UE从而可以删除这些PDCP PDU、这些PDCP PDU对应的编码包，或者通过这些编码包成功恢复出来的PDCP SDU中的至少一个。
作为另一种可能的实现方式，第四指示信息包括起始PDCP SN和终止PDCP SN信息。其中，起始PDCP SN用于指示从源基站收到的PDCP PDU中，UE需要删除的第一个PDCP PDU，终止PDCP SN用于指示从源基站收到的PDCP PDU中，UE需要删除的最后一个PDCP PDU。UE收到该指示信息后，将删除该第一个PDCP PDU到该最后一个PDCP PDU之间的所有从源基站收到的PDCP PDU。UE从而可以删除这些PDCP PDU、这些PDCP PDU对应的编码包，或者通过这些编码包成功恢复出来的PDCP SDU中的至少一个。
如图12所示，源基站将PDCP SDU1、PDCP SDU2和PDCP SDU3进行分割、级联、加padding等处理中的一项或多项得到多个等大小的原数据包，并将这些原数据包构成一个编码块进行编码运算和添加编码包包头后生成编码包，其中，这些编码包中携带第四指示信息，第四指示信息指示block ID＝0。源基站对编码包添加PDCP头后生成PDCP PDU，并将PDCP PDU发送给UE。UE成功接收源基站发送的PDCP PDU0和PDCP PDU2。UE根据第四指示信息，将删除以下至少一种数据：
1.PDCP PDU0、PDCP PDU2；或者，
2.PDCP PDU0对应的系统包1、PDCP PDU2对应的冗余包1；或者，
3.PDCP PDU0恢复出的PDCP SDU1。
示例4
与示例3类似，本实施例中，源基站在Xn接口上向目标基站转发PDCP SDU，其中，通过Xn接口转发的PDCP SDU包括源基站尚未经过PDCP层处理的PDCP SDU，和/或，和/或，对应于同一个编码块的一组PDCP SDU。在示例4中，第二数据包为对应于同一编码块的一组PDCP SDU，该一组PDCP SDU中的至少一个PDCP SDU是UE在切换前根据从源基站接收的数据包未恢复的，或者说，该一组PDCP SDU中包括第二PDCP SDU。
与示例3的区别在于，示例4中源基站向UE发送的PDCP SDU和源基站向目标基站转发的PDCP SDU携带了用于识别PDCP SDU的标识(可称为第一序号)，即：可以认为源基站将PDCP SDU和其对应的第一序号构成一个PDCP SDU’，并将PDCP SDU’作为PDCP SDU经过处理后向UE发送，以及将该PDCP SDU’在Xn接口上转发给目标基站，目标基站根据PDCP SDU’获得PDCP PDU后向UE进行转发，因此，UE根据来自于目标基站的PDCP PDU所获得的PDCP SDU’携带有第一序号。后续可通过SN’表示该第一序号，即：PDCP SDU’由PDCP SDU和SN’构成。UE可根据SN’识别来自于目标基站的PDCP SDU’和来自于源基站的PDCP SDU’是否重复，如果UE分别从源基站和目标基站获得了重复的PDCP SDU’，则UE删除重复的PDCP SDU’，以避免UE向上层递交重复的PDCP SDU’。可见，该示例中不需要通过第四指示信息来指示UE删除哪些数据。
可选的，示例4中存在两种可能的实现方式：
作为一种可能的实现方式，如图13所示，源基站可为每个PDCP SDU新增一个头字 段，用于携带该SDU所关联的SN’，生成PDCP SDU’。源基站通过GTP隧道向目标基站转发该PDCP SDU’。目标基站收到该PDCP SDU’后，采用现有PDCP SDU的处理机制对PDCP SDU’进行处理，并向UE发送数据。UE根据分别来自源基站和目标基站的PDCP SDU’中携带的SN’来执行重复包检测。如果UE发现来自于源基站的PDCP SDU’中携带的SN’与来自于目标基站的PDCP SDU’中携带的SN’相同，则可删除重复的PDCP SDU’。其中对于图13所示示例，第三数据包可包括目标基站生成的PDCP PDU0～PDCP PDU3。
作为另一种可能的实现方式，如图14所示，源基站将PDCP SDU封装在GTP隧道中发送到目标基站，并在GTP头字段中携带该PDCP SDU对应的SN’。目标基站从GTP隧道中提取出PDCP SDU和对应的SN’，由PDCP SDU和对应的SN’生成PDCP SDU’后，采用现有PDCP SDU的处理机制向UE发送数据。UE根据分别来自源基站和目标基站的PDCP SDU’中携带的SN’来执行重复包检测。UE可根据该SN’的取值识别来自于源基站的PDCP SDU和来自于目标基站的PDCP SDU中重复的PDCP SDU，如果发现来自于源基站的PDCP SDU的GTP头字段中携带的SN’与来自于目标基站的PDCP SDU’的GTP头字段中携带的SN’相同，则可删除PDCP SDU。其中对于图14所示示例，第三数据包可包括目标基站生成的PDCP PDU0～PDCP PDU3。
以上示例3和示例4以切换前后源基站和目标基站分别向UE发送包括系统包和冗余包的编码包的方案为例进行说明(即图7(b)示例的方法)。示例3和示例4同样适用于切换前后源基站和目标基站分别向UE发送原数据包和冗余包的方案(即图7(a)示意的方案)或其他网络编码方案。针对切换前后源基站和目标基站分别向UE发送原数据包和冗余包的方案中，需要将上述描述中的系统包替换成原数据包，编码包替换成原数据包和冗余包，这里就不再赘述。
示例5
示例5中，源基站支持网络编码功能，但目标基站不支持网络编码功能。示例5以网络编码功能位于PDCP层之上为例进行说明，例如，网络编码功能位于PDCP层和SDAP层之间新引入的一个协议层，或者，网络编码功能位于SDAP层内，或者，网络编码功能位于SDAP层之上。另外，示例5以切换前源gNB-CU向UE发送包括系统包和冗余包的编码包的方案(即图7(b)示例的方法)为例进行说明。
本实施例中，由于网络编码功能位于PDCP层之上，则源基站收到的PDCP SDU已经经过网络编码功能的处理。另外，示例5中，UE切换过程源基站通过Xn接口向目标基站发送的第二数据包为UE尚未成功接收的PDCP SDU，因此，通过Xn接口转发的PDCP SDU是经过网络编码功能处理的，目标基站对UE尚未成功接收的PDCP SDU进行PDCP层处理后生成PDCP PDU发送给UE。此外，由于目标基站不支持网络编码功能的处理，因此，目标基站从核心网接收的PDCP SDU没有经过网络编码功能的处理，目标基站对这些PDCP SDU进行PDCP层处理后生成PDCP PDU发送给UE。
如图15所示，如果UE通过第一信息向源基站指示未接收到PDCP SDU2以及PDCP SDU3，S-gNB-CU可向T-gNB-CU发送PDCP SDU2以及PDCP SDU3。如图15所示，该示例中的第三数据包包括根据PDCP SDU2以及PDCP SDU3获得的PDCP PDU。
对UE而言，对从目标基站收到的PDCP SDU存在两种处理，对经过网络编码功能的处理的PDCP SDU需要执行网络译码的处理，对未经过网络编码功能的处理的PDCP SDU 不需要执行网络译码的处理，因此，UE需要区分从目标基站收到的这两种PDCP SDU，此时可由目标基站向UE发送第五指示信息，该第五指示信息的实现方式可参照示例2中对于第五指示信息的说明，这里就不再赘述。根据该第五指示信息，在网络编码功能由高于第二协议层的第一协议层执行时，接收设备可根据第五指示信息获知PDCP PDU是否经过网络编码处理，从而决定是否对该PDCP PDU执行网络编码相应的译码处理，以正确接收第三数据包中的数据。其中，对PDCP PDU进行译码处理，包括根据PDCP PDU获得PDCP SDU后，对PDCP SDU进行译码处理。
本实施例同样适用于网络编码功能位于PDCP层内的场景，即源基站支持网络编码功能，目标基站不支持网络编码功能，如示例1中所述的Xn接口数据转发方式，源基站在Xn接口向目标基站转发冗余包，而目标基站从核心网收到的PDCP SDU不经过网络编码功能的处理生成PDCP PDU发送给UE。此时同样会导致UE需要区分从目标基站收到的这两种PDCP SDU，需要目标基站向UE发送第五指示信息。
示例5以UE接收编码包的方案为例进行说明(即图7(b)示例的方法，编码包包括系统包和冗余包)。本实施例同样适用于UE接收原数据包和冗余包的方案(即图7(a)示意的方案)或其他网络编码方案，具体实现方式可参照UE接收编码包的方案的实现方式，不再赘述。针对UE接收原数据包和冗余包的方案中，需要将上述描述中的编码包替换成原数据包和冗余包，这里不再赘述。
此外，本申请中，在源基站和目标基站均支持网络编码功能的情况下，在UE切换准备过程中，源基站还可以将网络编码功能的配置信息(包括网络编码相关参数信息)等相关信息发送到目标基站，以便目标基站使用该信息进行网络编码功能的处理。具体的，该网络编码相关参数信息可包括网络编码类型、编码块的大小、系统包的大小、原数据包的大小、系统包的个数、原数据包的个数、冗余包的个数、编码系数的选择或卷积深度中的至少一种。如果源基站和目标基站采用相同的参数执行网络编码功能的处理，则UE可采用同一套参数对分别来自于源基站和目标基站的编码包进行解码，以提高解码效率。
可选的，目标基站可向源基站发送第六指示信息，用于指示目标基站是否支持网络编码功能。如果目标基站支持网络编码功能，则源基站和目标基站可实现以上示例1至示例4中的任意一种。如果目标基站不支持网络编码功能，则源基站和目标基站可实现以上示例5所示方案。
基于相同的发明构思，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置，用于实现以上由源发送设备、接收设备和/或目标发送设备实现的功能。该装置可包括图16和/或图17所示结构。
如图16所示，本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置可以包括收发模块1620以及处理模块1610，以上收发模块1620以及处理模块1610之间相互耦合。该通信装置可用于执行以上图9至图15中所示的由源发送设备(或源基站)、接收设备(或UE)或目标发送设备(或目标基站)中的任意一个或多个所执行的步骤。具体的，该收发模块1620可用于支持通信装置进行通信，收发模块1620也可被称为通信单元、通信接口、收发模块或收发单元。收发模块1620可具备无线通信功能，例如能够通过无线通信方式与UE进行通信，以及可具备有线通信功能，用于支持通信装置通过有线通信接口(如Xn接口)进行通信。处理模块1610可用于支持该通信装置执行上述方法实施例中所示的由源发送设备、接收设备或目标发送设备中的任意一个或多个所执行的步骤，和上述实施例未示出的一些步骤，执行步骤包括但不限于：生成由收发模块1620发送的信息、消息，和/或，对收发模块1620 接收的信号进行解调解码处理等等。
在通过图16所示结构实现本申请实施例提供的源发送设备时，收发模块1620可用于向接收设备发送第一数据包。收发模块1620还可接收来自于所述接收设备的第一信息。收发模块1620还可根据第一信息向目标发送设备发送第二数据包。
在一种可能的示例中，收发模块1620还可用于发送以下中的至少一项：第一指示信息至第四指示信息，网络编码功能的配置信息，或者用于发送承载第二数据包的GTP隧道的标识与该GTP隧道对应的第一指示信息。
在一种可能的示例中，收发模块1620还可用于接收以下中的至少一项：第一信息或第六指示信息。
在通过图16所示结构实现本申请实施例提供的接收设备时，收发模块1620可用于接收来自于源发送设备的第一数据包，并发送第一信息。收发模块1620还可用于接收来自于目标发送设备的第三数据包。
在一种可能的示例中，收发模块1620还可用于接收以下中的至少一项：第四指示信息或第五指示信息。
在通过图16所示结构实现本申请实施例提供的目标发送设备时，收发模块1620可用于接收来自于源发送设备的第二数据包，并发送第三数据包。收发模块1620还可用于接收来自于目标发送设备的第三数据包，和/或用于接收承载第二数据包的GTP隧道的标识以及该GTP隧道的标识对应的第一指示信息。
在一种可能的示例中，收发模块1620还可用于发送第六指示信息。
在一种可能的示例中，收发模块1620还可用于接收以下中的至少一项：第一指示信息至第四指示信息，或网络编码功能的配置信息。
应理解，装置实施例中出现的各个术语以及各种可能的实现方式的细节可以参考上述方法实施例中的描述或解释，此处不予赘述。
图17示出了另一种通信装置的结构示意图，用于执行本申请实施例提供的由源发送设备、接收设备或目标发送设备中的至少一个执行的动作。如图17所示，通信装置可包括处理器和存储器。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对通信装置进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。通信接口主要用于源发送设备与目标发送设备之间的通信。
以上通信装置还可包括天线和射频电路，用于通过无线通信方式进行通信，例如，源发送设备或目标发送设备可通过天线和射频电路向接收设备发送数据，接收设备可通过天线和射频电路接收数据。当需要发送数据(或信息、信号)时，通信装置的处理器还可对待发送的数据进行基带处理，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据(或信息、信号)发送到通信装置时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。
在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和/或射频电路视为通信装置的收发单元。收发单元还可包括通信接口等。收发单元可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元能够实现发送功能和接收功能；或者，收发单元也可以包括两个功能单元，分别为能够实现接收功能的接收单元和能够实现发送功能的发送单元。还可将具有处理功能的处理器视为通信装置的处理单元。如图17所示，通信装置可包括收发单元1710和处理单元1720。收发单元 也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。可选的，可以将收发单元1710中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元1710中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元1710包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
应理解，收发单元1710可与收发模块1620对应，或者说，收发模块1620可由收发单元1710实现。收发单元1710用于执行本申请所示实施例中的源发送设备、接收设备或目标发送设备中的至少一个的发送操作和接收操作，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理单元1720可与处理模块1610对应，或者说，处理模块1610可由处理单元1720实现。处理单元1720用于执行本申请所示实施例源发送设备、接收设备或目标发送设备中的至少一个的，除了收发操作之外的其他操作，例如用于执行本申请所示实施例中由源发送设备、接收设备或目标发送设备中的至少一个所执行的除接收和发送以外的全部操作，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
也就是说，以上示例中由处理模块1610执行的动作可由图17所示的处理单元1720执行，不再赘述。同理，以上由收发模块1620执行的动作可由图17所示的收发单元1710执行。
为便于说明，图17中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的通信装置中，可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
可以理解，在本申请中，“当…时”、“若”以及“如果”均指在某种客观情况下装置会做出相应的处理，并非是限定时间，且也不要求装置实现时一定要有判断的动作，也不意味着存在其它限定。
本申请中的“同时”可以理解为在相同的时间点，也可以理解为在一段时间段内，还可以理解为在同一个周期内，具体可以结合上下文进行理解。
可以理解，在本申请各实施例中，“与A相应的B”表示B与A相关联。“根据A确定B”并不意味着仅仅根据A确定B，还可以根据A和/或其它信息确定B。
本申请中各表所示的对应关系可以被配置，也可以是预定义的。各表中的信息的取值仅仅是举例，可以配置为其他值，本申请并不限定。在配置信息与各参数的对应关系时，并不一定要求必须配置各表中示意出的所有对应关系。例如，本申请中的表格中，某些行示出的对应关系也可以不配置。又例如，可以基于上述表格做适当的变形调整，例如，拆分，合并等等。上述各表中标题示出参数的名称也可以采用通信装置可理解的其他名称，其参数的取值或表示方式也可以通信装置可理解的其他取值或表示方式。上述各表在实现时，也可以采用其他的数据结构，例如可以采用数组、队列、容器、栈、线性表、指针、链表、树、图、结构体、类、堆、散列表或哈希表等。
本申请中的预定义可以理解为定义、预先定义、存储、预存储、预协商、预配置、固化、或预烧制。
在本申请实施例中，应注意，本申请实施例上述的方法实施例可以应用于处理器中，或者由处理器实现。处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程 中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated Circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
上述实施例所提供的方法，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品可以包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁盘)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘solid state disk(SSD))等。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装 置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器、随机存取存储器、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。

Claims (82)

  1. 一种数据发送方法，其特征在于，包括：
    源发送设备向接收设备发送第一数据包，所述第一数据包包括原数据包和/或第一冗余包，或者，所述第一数据包包括系统包和/或第一冗余包，其中，所述第一冗余包通过对所述原数据包的网络编码获得，所述原数据包根据原始数据获得，所述系统包根据所述原数据包获得，所述原始数据为待执行网络编码功能的处理的第一协议层的服务数据单元SDU；
    所述源发送设备接收来自于所述接收设备的第一信息；
    所述源发送设备根据所述第一信息，向所述接收设备的目标发送设备发送第二数据包，所述第二数据包用于所述接收设备恢复所述原始数据；
    其中，所述第一信息用于指示以下中的至少一项：
    所述接收设备根据所述第一数据包恢复的第二协议层的SDU中的第一SDU，所述第二协议层与所述第一协议层为同一协议层或不同的协议层，所述第二协议层的SDU对应于所述第一协议层的SDU，或者，
    待接收的冗余包的个数信息，所述待接收的冗余包用于所述接收设备恢复所述原始数据；或者，
    所述接收设备正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息，或者，
    所述接收设备未正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，如果所述第一信息用于指示所述接收设备对所述第一数据包成功译码，所述方法还包括：
    所述源发送设备不向所述目标发送设备发送所述第二数据包。
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标发送设备为所述接收设备执行切换后与所述接收设备通信的设备，所述源发送设备为所述接收设备执行切换前与所述接收设备通信的设备。
  4. 如权利要求1-3中任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的第二冗余包，所述第二冗余包包括所述第一冗余包和/或不同于所述第一冗余包的冗余包。
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述源发送设备向所述目标发送设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的类型为冗余包类型。
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包承载于通用无线分组业务隧道协议GTP隧道，所述第一指示信息携带在所述GTP隧道的GTP头字段中。
  7. 如权利要求1-3中任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包括所述第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU，所述第二SDU不包括所述第一SDU。
  8. 如权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述源发送设备向所述目标发送设备发送第二指示信息；
    其中，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备是否对所述第二数据包执行网络编码功能的处理；和/或，
    所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的类型为SDU类型。
  9. 如权利要求7或8所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述源发送设备向目标发送设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备执行网络编码功能处理的第一个编码块的信息，或者，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述源发送设备执行网络编码功能处理的最后一个编码块的信息。
  10. 如权利要求1-3中任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的一组所述第二协议层的SDU。
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述源发送设备向所述接收设备发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述接收设备删除与所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU中的全部或部分数据重复的数据，所述重复的数据包括以下中的至少一项：所述第二协议层的PDU、所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包，或者通过所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包成功恢复的所述第二协议层的SDU。
  12. 如权利要求10或11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一协议层和所述第二协议层为同一协议层，所述第一数据包所对应的第二协议层的SDU包括第一序号；
    所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU中的每个所述第二协议层的SDU包括第一序号，所述第一序号用于标识所述第二协议层的SDU。
  13. 如权利要求1-12中任一所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述源发送设备接收来自于所述目标发送设备的第六指示信息，所述第六指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备是否支持所述网络编码功能的处理。
  14. 如权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述源发送设备向所述目标发送设备发送所述网络编码功能的配置信息，所述配置信息包括以下中的至少一项：
    网络编码类型、编码块的大小、系统包的大小、系统包的个数、冗余包的个数、编码系数的选择，或卷积深度。
  15. 如权利要求1-14中任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一协议层包括服务数据适配协议SDAP层、无线链路控制RLC层或分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层，所述第二协议层包括PDCP层。
  16. 一种数据接收方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收设备接收来自于源发送设备的第一数据包，所述第一数据包包括原数据包和/或第一冗余包，或者，所述第一数据包包括系统包和/或第一冗余包，其中，所述第一冗余包通过对所述原数据包的网络编码获得，所述原数据包根据原始数据获得，所述系统包根据所述原数据包获得，所述原始数据为待执行网络编码功能的处理的第一协议层的服务数据单元SDU；
    所述接收设备向所述源发送设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于从所述源发送设备至目标发送设备的第二数据包的确定，所述第二数据包用于所述接收设备恢复所述原始数据，且所述第一信息用于指示以下中的至少一项：
    所述接收设备根据所述第一数据包恢复的第二协议层的SDU中的第一SDU，所述第二协议层与所述第一协议层为同一协议层或不同的协议层，所述第二协议层的SDU对应于所述第一协议层的SDU，或者，
    待接收的冗余包的个数信息，所述待接收的冗余包用于所述接收设备恢复所述原始数 据；或者，
    所述接收设备正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息，或者，
    所述接收设备未正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息；
    所述接收设备接收来自于所述目标发送设备的第三数据包，所述第三数据包对应于所述第二数据包。
  17. 如权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标发送设备为所述接收设备执行切换后与所述接收设备通信的设备，所述源发送设备为所述接收设备执行切换前与所述接收设备通信的设备。
  18. 如权利要求16或17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的第二冗余包，所述第二冗余包包括所述第一冗余包和/或不同于所述第一冗余包的冗余包；或者，
    所述第二数据包包括所述第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU，所述第二SDU不包括所述第一SDU；或者，
    所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的一组所述第二协议层的SDU。
  19. 如权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的第二冗余包，所述第一协议层高于所述第二协议层，所述第三数据包对应于所述第二协议层的PDU，所述第二协议层的PDU携带第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息指示所述PDU是否经过网络编码功能的处理。
  20. 如权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述第二SDU，对应于所述第二SDU的第三数据包包括所述第二协议层的PDU，所述PDU携带第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息指示所述PDU是否经过网络编码功能的处理。
  21. 如权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU，还包括：
    所述接收设备接收来自于所述源发送设备或所述目标发送设备的第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述接收设备删除与所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU中的全部或部分数据重复的数据，所述重复的数据包括以下中的至少一项：所述第二协议层的PDU、所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包，或者通过所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包成功恢复的所述第二协议层的SDU。
  22. 如权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU，所述第一协议层和所述第二协议层为同一协议层，所述第一数据包和所述第三数据包所对应的第二协议层的SDU均包括第一序号；
    所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU中的每个所述第二协议层的SDU包括第一序号，所述第一序号用于标识所述第二协议层的SDU。
  23. 如权利要求16-22中任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一协议层包括SDAP层、RLC层或PDCP层，所述第二协议层包括PDCP层。
  24. 一种数据发送方法，其特征在于，包括：
    目标发送设备接收来自于源发送设备的第二数据包，所述第二数据包用于接收设备恢复原始数据，所述原始数据用于由所述源发送设备发送至所述接收设备的第一数据包的确定，所述第一数据包包括原数据包和/或第一冗余包，或者，所述第一数据包包括系统包和/或第一冗余包，其中，所述第一冗余包通过对所述原数据包的网络编码获得，所述原数据 包根据原始数据获得，所述系统包根据所述原数据包获得，所述原始数据为待执行网络编码功能的处理的第一协议层的服务数据单元SDU；
    所述目标发送设备向所述接收设备发送第三数据包，所述第三数据包对应于所述第二数据包；
    其中，所述第二数据包与第一信息有关，所述第一信息用于指示以下中的至少一项：
    所述接收设备根据所述第一数据包恢复的第二协议层的SDU中的第一SDU，所述第二协议层与所述第一协议层为同一协议层或不同的协议层，所述第二协议层的SDU对应于所述第一协议层的SDU，或者，
    待接收的冗余包的个数信息，所述待接收的冗余包用于所述接收设备恢复所述原始数据；或者，
    所述接收设备正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息，或者，
    所述接收设备未正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息。
  25. 如权利要求24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标发送设备为所述接收设备执行切换后与所述接收设备通信的设备，所述源发送设备为所述接收设备执行切换前与所述接收设备通信的设备。
  26. 如权利要求24或25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的第二冗余包，所述第二冗余包包括所述第一冗余包和/或不同于所述第一冗余包的冗余包。
  27. 如权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述目标发送设备接收来自于所述源发送设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的类型为冗余包类型。
  28. 如权利要求27所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包承载于通用无线分组业务隧道协议GTP隧道，所述第一指示信息携带在所述GTP隧道的GTP头字段中。
  29. 如权利要求24或25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU，所述第二SDU不包括所述第一SDU。
  30. 如权利要求29所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述目标发送设备接收来自于所述源发送设备的第二指示信息；
    其中，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备是否对所述第二数据包执行网络编码功能的处理；和/或，
    所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的类型为SDU类型。
  31. 如权利要求29或30所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述目标发送设备接收来自于所述源发送设备的第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备执行网络编码功能处理的第一个编码块的信息，或者，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述源发送设备执行网络编码功能处理的最后一个编码块的信息。
  32. 如权利要求24或25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的一组所述第二协议层的SDU。
  33. 如权利要求32所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述目标发送设备接收来自于所述源发送设备的第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述接收设备删除与所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU中的全部或部分数据重复的数据，所述重复的数据包括以下中的至少一项：所述第二协议层的PDU、所述第二协议层 的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包，或者通过所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包成功恢复的所述第二协议层的SDU。
  34. 如权利要求32或33所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一数据包和所述第三数据包所对应的第二协议层的协议数据单元PDU均包括第一序号，所述第一序号用于标识所述第二协议层的所述SDU；所述一组第二协议层的SDU中的每个第二协议层的SDU包括所述第一序号，或者，所述一组第二协议层的SDU中的每个第二协议层的SDU具有对应的所述第一序号，所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU承载于GTP隧道，所述第一序号携带在所述GTP隧道的GTP头字段中。
  35. 如权利要求24-34中任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述目标发送设备向所述源发送设备发送第六指示信息，所述第六指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备是否支持所述网络编码功能的处理。
  36. 如权利要求24-35中任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述目标发送设备接收来自于所述源发送设备的所述网络编码功能的配置信息，所述配置信息包括以下中的至少一项：
    网络编码类型、编码块的大小、系统包的大小、系统包的个数、冗余包的个数、编码系数的选择，或卷积深度。
  37. 如权利要求24-36中任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一协议层包括服务数据适配协议SDAP层、无线链路控制RLC层或分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层，所述第二协议层包括PDCP层。
  38. 一种数据发送装置，其特征在于，包括：
    发送单元，用于向接收设备发送第一数据包，所述第一数据包包括原数据包和/或第一冗余包，或者，所述第一数据包包括系统包和/或第一冗余包，其中，所述第一冗余包通过对所述原数据包的网络编码获得，所述原数据包根据原始数据获得，所述系统包根据所述原数据包获得，所述原始数据为待执行网络编码功能的处理的第一协议层的服务数据单元SDU；
    接收单元，用于接收来自于所述接收设备的第一信息；
    所述发送单元，还用于根据所述第一信息，向所述接收设备的目标发送设备发送第二数据包，所述第二数据包用于所述接收设备恢复所述原始数据；
    其中，所述第一信息用于指示以下中的至少一项：
    所述接收设备根据所述第一数据包恢复的第二协议层的SDU中的第一SDU，所述第二协议层与所述第一协议层为同一协议层或不同的协议层，所述第二协议层的SDU对应于所述第一协议层的SDU，或者，
    待接收的冗余包的个数信息，所述待接收的冗余包用于所述接收设备恢复所述原始数据；或者，
    所述接收设备正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息，或者，
    所述接收设备未正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息。
  39. 如权利要求38所述的装置，其特征在于，如果所述第一信息用于指示所述接收设备对所述第一数据包成功译码，所述发送单元还用于：
    不向所述目标发送设备发送所述第二数据包。
  40. 如权利要求38或39所述的装置，其特征在于，所述目标发送设备为所述接收设备 执行切换后与所述接收设备通信的设备，源发送设备为所述接收设备执行切换前与所述接收设备通信的设备。
  41. 如权利要求38-40中任一所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的第二冗余包，所述第二冗余包包括所述第一冗余包和/或不同于所述第一冗余包的冗余包。
  42. 如权利要求41所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送单元还用于：
    向所述目标发送设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的类型为冗余包类型。
  43. 如权利要求42所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包承载于通用无线分组业务隧道协议GTP隧道，所述第一指示信息携带在所述GTP隧道的GTP头字段中。
  44. 如权利要求38-40中任一所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包括所述第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU，所述第二SDU不包括所述第一SDU。
  45. 如权利要求44所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送单元还用于：
    向所述目标发送设备发送第二指示信息；
    其中，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备是否对所述第二数据包执行网络编码功能的处理；和/或，
    所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的类型为SDU类型。
  46. 如权利要求44或45所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送单元还用于：
    向目标发送设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备执行网络编码功能处理的第一个编码块的信息，或者，所述第三指示信息用于指示源发送设备执行网络编码功能处理的最后一个编码块的信息。
  47. 如权利要求38-40中任一所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的一组所述第二协议层的SDU。
  48. 如权利要求47所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送单元还用于：
    向所述接收设备发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述接收设备删除与所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU中的全部或部分数据重复的数据，所述重复的数据包括以下中的至少一项：所述第二协议层的PDU、所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包，或者通过所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包成功恢复的所述第二协议层的SDU。
  49. 如权利要求47或48所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一协议层和所述第二协议层为同一协议层，所述第一数据包所对应的第二协议层的SDU包括第一序号；
    所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU中的每个所述第二协议层的SDU包括第一序号，所述第一序号用于标识所述第二协议层的SDU。
  50. 如权利要求38-49中任一所述的装置，其特征在于，所述接收单元还用于：
    接收来自于所述目标发送设备的第六指示信息，所述第六指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备是否支持所述网络编码功能的处理。
  51. 如权利要求50所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送单元还用于：
    向所述目标发送设备发送所述网络编码功能的配置信息，所述配置信息包括以下中的至少一项：
    网络编码类型、编码块的大小、系统包的大小、系统包的个数、冗余包的个数、编码 系数的选择，或卷积深度。
  52. 如权利要求38-51中任一所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一协议层包括服务数据适配协议SDAP层、无线链路控制RLC层或分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层，所述第二协议层包括PDCP层。
  53. 一种数据接收装置，其特征在于，包括：
    接收单元，用于接收来自于源发送设备的第一数据包，所述第一数据包包括原数据包和/或第一冗余包，或者，所述第一数据包包括系统包和/或第一冗余包，其中，所述第一冗余包通过对所述原数据包的网络编码获得，所述原数据包根据原始数据获得，所述系统包根据所述原数据包获得，所述原始数据为待执行网络编码功能的处理的第一协议层的服务数据单元SDU；
    发送单元，用于向所述源发送设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于从所述源发送设备至目标发送设备的第二数据包的确定，所述第二数据包用于接收设备恢复所述原始数据，且所述第一信息用于指示以下中的至少一项：
    所述接收设备根据所述第一数据包恢复的第二协议层的SDU中的第一SDU，所述第二协议层与所述第一协议层为同一协议层或不同的协议层，所述第二协议层的SDU对应于所述第一协议层的SDU，或者，
    待接收的冗余包的个数信息，所述待接收的冗余包用于所述接收设备恢复所述原始数据；或者，
    所述接收设备正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息，或者，
    所述接收设备未正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息；
    所述接收单元，还用于接收来自于所述目标发送设备的第三数据包，所述第三数据包对应于所述第二数据包。
  54. 如权利要求53所述的装置，其特征在于，所述目标发送设备为所述接收设备执行切换后与所述接收设备通信的设备，所述源发送设备为所述接收设备执行切换前与所述接收设备通信的设备。
  55. 如权利要求53或54所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的第二冗余包，所述第二冗余包包括所述第一冗余包和/或不同于所述第一冗余包的冗余包；或者，
    所述第二数据包包括所述第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU，所述第二SDU不包括所述第一SDU；或者，
    所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的一组所述第二协议层的SDU。
  56. 如权利要求55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的第二冗余包，所述第一协议层高于所述第二协议层，所述第三数据包对应于所述第二协议层的PDU，所述第二协议层的PDU携带第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息指示所述PDU是否经过网络编码功能的处理。
  57. 如权利要求55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述第二SDU，对应于所述第二SDU的第三数据包包括所述第二协议层的PDU，所述PDU携带第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息指示所述PDU是否经过网络编码功能的处理。
  58. 如权利要求55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU，所述接收单元还用于：
    接收来自于所述源发送设备或所述目标发送设备的第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述接收设备删除与所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU中的全部或部分数据重复的数据，所述重复的数据包括以下中的至少一项：所述第二协议层的PDU、所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包，或者通过所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包成功恢复的所述第二协议层的SDU。
  59. 如权利要求55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU，所述第一协议层和所述第二协议层为同一协议层，所述第一数据包和所述第三数据包所对应的第二协议层的SDU均包括第一序号；
    所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU中的每个所述第二协议层的SDU包括第一序号，所述第一序号用于标识所述第二协议层的SDU。
  60. 如权利要求53-59中任一所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一协议层包括SDAP层、RLC层或PDCP层，所述第二协议层包括PDCP层。
  61. 一种数据发送装置，其特征在于，包括：
    接收单元，用于接收来自于源发送设备的第二数据包，所述第二数据包用于接收设备恢复原始数据，所述原始数据用于由所述源发送设备发送至所述接收设备的第一数据包的确定，所述第一数据包包括原数据包和/或第一冗余包，或者，所述第一数据包包括系统包和/或第一冗余包，其中，所述第一冗余包通过对所述原数据包的网络编码获得，所述原数据包根据原始数据获得，所述系统包根据所述原数据包获得，所述原始数据为待执行网络编码功能的处理的第一协议层的服务数据单元SDU；
    发送单元，用于向所述接收设备发送第三数据包，所述第三数据包对应于所述第二数据包；
    其中，所述第二数据包与第一信息有关，所述第一信息用于指示以下中的至少一项：
    所述接收设备根据所述第一数据包恢复的第二协议层的SDU中的第一SDU，所述第二协议层与所述第一协议层为同一协议层或不同的协议层，所述第二协议层的SDU对应于所述第一协议层的SDU，或者，
    待接收的冗余包的个数信息，所述待接收的冗余包用于所述接收设备恢复所述原始数据；或者，
    所述接收设备正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息，或者，
    所述接收设备未正确接收的所述第一数据包的个数信息。
  62. 如权利要求61所述的装置，其特征在于，目标发送设备为所述接收设备执行切换后与所述接收设备通信的设备，所述源发送设备为所述接收设备执行切换前与所述接收设备通信的设备。
  63. 如权利要求61或62所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的第二冗余包，所述第二冗余包包括所述第一冗余包和/或不同于所述第一冗余包的冗余包。
  64. 如权利要求63所述的装置，其特征在于，所述接收单元还用于：
    接收来自于所述源发送设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的类型为冗余包类型。
  65. 如权利要求64所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包承载于通用无线分组业务隧道协议GTP隧道，所述第一指示信息携带在所述GTP隧道的GTP头字段中。
  66. 如权利要求61或62所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述第二协议层的SDU中的第二SDU，所述第二SDU不包括所述第一SDU。
  67. 如权利要求66所述的装置，其特征在于，所述接收单元还用于：
    接收来自于所述源发送设备的第二指示信息；
    其中，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备是否对所述第二数据包执行网络编码功能的处理；和/或，
    所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的类型为SDU类型。
  68. 如权利要求66或67所述的装置，其特征在于，所述接收单元还用于：
    接收来自于所述源发送设备的第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备执行网络编码功能处理的第一个编码块的信息，或者，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述源发送设备执行网络编码功能处理的最后一个编码块的信息。
  69. 如权利要求61或62所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二数据包包括所述原始数据对应的一组所述第二协议层的SDU。
  70. 如权利要求69所述的装置，其特征在于，所述接收单元还用于：
    接收来自于所述源发送设备的第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述接收设备删除与所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU中的全部或部分数据重复的数据，所述重复的数据包括以下中的至少一项：所述第二协议层的PDU、所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包，或者通过所述第二协议层的PDU对应的系统包和/或冗余包成功恢复的所述第二协议层的SDU。
  71. 如权利要求69或70所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一数据包和所述第三数据包所对应的第二协议层的协议数据单元PDU均包括第一序号，所述第一序号用于标识所述第二协议层的所述SDU；所述一组第二协议层的SDU中的每个第二协议层的SDU包括所述第一序号，或者，所述一组第二协议层的SDU中的每个第二协议层的SDU具有对应的所述第一序号，所述一组所述第二协议层的SDU承载于GTP隧道，所述第一序号携带在所述GTP隧道的GTP头字段中。
  72. 如权利要求61-71中任一所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送单元还用于：
    向所述源发送设备发送第六指示信息，所述第六指示信息用于指示所述目标发送设备是否支持所述网络编码功能的处理。
  73. 如权利要求61-72中任一所述的装置，其特征在于，所述接收单元还用于：
    接收来自于所述源发送设备的所述网络编码功能的配置信息，所述配置信息包括以下中的至少一项：
    网络编码类型、编码块的大小、系统包的大小、系统包的个数、冗余包的个数、编码系数的选择，或卷积深度。
  74. 如权利要求61-73中任一所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一协议层包括服务数据适配协议SDAP层、无线链路控制RLC层或分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层，所述第二协议层包括PDCP层。
  75. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机可读指令，当所述计算机可读指令运行时，如权利要求1或从属于权利要求1的权利要求2-15任一项所述的方法被执行，或，如权利要求16或从属于权利要求16的权利要求17-23任一项所述的方法被执行，或，如权利要求24或从属于权利要求24的权利要求25-37任一 项所述的方法被执行。
  76. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，所述计算机程序产品中存储有计算机可读指令，当所述计算机可读指令运行时，如权利要求1或从属于权利要求1的权利要求2-15任一项所述的方法被执行，或，如权利要求16或从属于权利要求16的权利要求17-23任一项所述的方法被执行，或，如权利要求24或从属于权利要求24的权利要求25-37任一项所述的方法被执行。
  77. 一种装置，其特征在于，包括电路，所述电路用于执行如权利要求1或从属于权利要求1的权利要求2-15任一项所述的方法，或，如权利要求16或从属于权利要求16的权利要求17-23任一项所述的方法，或，如权利要求24或从属于权利要求24的权利要求25-37任一项所述的方法。
  78. 一种装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器存储有指令，所述指令被执行时，使得所述装置执行如权利要求1或从属于权利要求1的权利要求2-15任一项所述的方法，或，如权利要求16或从属于权利要求16的权利要求17-23任一项所述的方法，或，如权利要求24或从属于权利要求24的权利要求25-37任一项所述的方法。
  79. 一种装置，其特征在于，包括用于执行如权利要求1或从属于权利要求1的权利要求2-15任一项所述的方法，或，如权利要求16或从属于权利要求16的权利要求17-23任一项所述的方法，或，如权利要求24或从属于权利要求24的权利要求25-37任一项所述的方法的模块。
  80. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器和存储器，所述处理器与所述存储器耦合；
    存储器存储有计算机程序；
    处理器，用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述装置执行如权利要求1或从属于权利要求1的权利要求2-15任一项所述的方法，或，如权利要求16或从属于权利要求16的权利要求17-23任一项所述的方法，或，如权利要求24或从属于权利要求24的权利要求25-37任一项所述的方法。
  81. 一种芯片，其特征在于，所述芯片与存储器耦合，用于读取并执行所述存储器中存储的程序指令，以执行如权利要求1或从属于权利要求1的权利要求2-15任一项所述的方法，或，如权利要求16或从属于权利要求16的权利要求17-23任一项所述的方法，或，如权利要求24或从属于权利要求24的权利要求25-37任一项所述的方法。
  82. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括如权利要求38或从属于权利要求38的权利要求39-52中的任一项所述的装置，或，如权利要求53或从属于权利要求53的权利要求54-60中的任一项所述的装置，或，如权利要求61或从属于权利要求61的权利要求62-74中的任一项所述的装置中的至少一项。
PCT/CN2022/107660 2021-07-28 2022-07-25 一种切换场景的数据转发方法及装置 WO2023005885A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110857567.0A CN115694719A (zh) 2021-07-28 2021-07-28 一种切换场景的数据转发方法及装置
CN202110857567.0 2021-07-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023005885A1 true WO2023005885A1 (zh) 2023-02-02

Family

ID=85058423

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/107660 WO2023005885A1 (zh) 2021-07-28 2022-07-25 一种切换场景的数据转发方法及装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115694719A (zh)
WO (1) WO2023005885A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024139263A1 (en) * 2023-08-18 2024-07-04 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited Method and apparatus of supporting packet data convergence protocol (pdcp) concatenation

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104753627A (zh) * 2013-12-26 2015-07-01 中兴通讯股份有限公司 多路径传输方法、系统及数据发送装置和数据接收装置
US20180083737A1 (en) * 2016-09-16 2018-03-22 International Business Machines Corporation Redundancy in converged networks
CN111886893A (zh) * 2018-09-29 2020-11-03 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 一种数据包处理方法、实体及存储介质
CN113114411A (zh) * 2020-01-13 2021-07-13 维沃移动通信有限公司 数据传输方法和设备

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104753627A (zh) * 2013-12-26 2015-07-01 中兴通讯股份有限公司 多路径传输方法、系统及数据发送装置和数据接收装置
US20180083737A1 (en) * 2016-09-16 2018-03-22 International Business Machines Corporation Redundancy in converged networks
CN111886893A (zh) * 2018-09-29 2020-11-03 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 一种数据包处理方法、实体及存储介质
CN113114411A (zh) * 2020-01-13 2021-07-13 维沃移动通信有限公司 数据传输方法和设备

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115694719A (zh) 2023-02-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN108617029B (zh) 无线承载配置方法、及相应的ue和基站
KR102619662B1 (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서 데이터 처리 방법 및 장치
JP7258882B2 (ja) 方法及び装置
CN112219445A (zh) 在异构网络中执行双连接的方法和装置
EP4089936A1 (en) Data processing method and apparatus
WO2022001367A1 (zh) 一种编码方法及装置
WO2023005885A1 (zh) 一种切换场景的数据转发方法及装置
WO2022228467A1 (zh) 数据传输方法、装置及可读存储介质
CN113543217A (zh) 数据传输方法及通信装置
WO2021169732A1 (zh) 一种切换方法及通信装置
WO2023005909A1 (zh) 网络编码场景下的超时丢包方法、装置及可读存储介质
WO2018103637A1 (zh) 数据处理的方法、发送设备和接收设备
WO2022268130A1 (zh) 一种网络编码方法及装置
TWI685225B (zh) 通信方法和終端設備
JP2023062123A (ja) 無線通信装置、無線通信方法、及び無線通信システム
JP7036118B2 (ja) 再送制御方法、無線端末、無線基地局
EP4351028A1 (en) Data processing method and apparatus
WO2021208863A1 (zh) 数据传输方法及通信装置
WO2023284666A1 (zh) 一种网络编码功能的配置方法以及相关装置
CN110708723B (zh) 一种数据传输方法及装置
WO2023016506A1 (zh) 传输数据的方法及通信装置
KR102661184B1 (ko) 무선 통신 시스템, 송수신 방법, 프로그램, 무선 통신 기지국 장치, 제어 회로 및 제어 방법
WO2023125341A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2024199031A1 (zh) 通信方法与通信装置
WO2023169243A1 (zh) 信息处理方法及装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22848490

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22848490

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1